SJ-20141110151550-006-ZXSDR UniRAN TDD-LTE (V3.20.50) Initial Configuration Guide

ZXSDR UniRAN
TD-LTE Base Station
Command Reference
Version: V3.20.50
ZTE CORPORATION
No. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
Fax: +86-755-26770801
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2015 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited.
Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit the ZTE technical support website http://support.zte.com.cn to inquire for related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
R2.0
2015-06-02
Added the following items

SHOW HDLC, SHOW AAL5, BLOCK E1, UNBLOCK E1,
SHOW PPP, SHOW IMA, SHOW TCP, BLOCK STM1,
UNBLOCK STM1,
SHOW CHANNEL STM1,
BLOCK
CHANNEL STM1,
UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1,
SET
GAIN, SHOW E1, SHOW T1, MOVETO TARGETSUBNET,

OPTIMIZE ORACLE, SHOW NE DB STATUS, UPDATE
DHCP
CONFIGURATION,
WB_SHOW,
WB_CMD,
WB_BIND, SET CLOCK, SHOW CLOCK, SET RAS

AZIMUTH, SHOW RAS AZIMUTH, OPTIMIZE ORACLE
l
Updated functions of the following items:

UPLOAD LOG, SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE, SHOW
NOTCHFILTER STATUS, SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN, SET
NOTCHFILTER CLOSE, SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA,
SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA, SHOW BAT ACOM
DEVICE DATA, SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA, SHOW
BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA
Updated the radio parameter description of all items
Updated the paramerter description of the following items:
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
ZTE Proprietary and Confidential
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA, SHOW BAT
TMA11 DEVICE DATA, SET BAT RET20 DATA, SHOW
BOARD MODE, BLOCK RRU, UNBLOCK RRU, SHOW TIME
l
R1.1
2015-03-03
Updated examples of all items
V3.20.50.20
Modified the following items:
TDD_STARTUPCELL,
TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS,
TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
R1.0
2014-11-17
V3.20.50.20
First edition.
Serial Number: SJ-20141110151550-007

Publishing Date: 2015-06-02 (R2.0)
TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL,
TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES,
Contents
About This Manual ......................................................................................... I
Chapter 1 System Management ................................................................ 1-1
1.1 GETCPURATIO ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 GETRAMUSAGE ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 GETHDUSAGE.................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 GETDBRATIO.................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5 GETHDUSAGEBYNAME.................................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 2 Configuration Managment ....................................................... 2-1

2.1 SYNC ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 ANTI.................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 CREATE ............................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4 UPDATE ............................................................................................................ 2-6
2.5 DELETE ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.6 QUERY ............................................................................................................. 2-9
2.7 MULTIREQUEST ..............................................................................................2-11
2.8 BACKUP ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9 RESTORE ....................................................................................................... 2-14
2.10 APPLY MUTEXRIGHT.................................................................................... 2-16
2.11 RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT ............................................................................... 2-17
2.12 KILL MUTEXRIGHT ....................................................................................... 2-18
2.13 QUERY SNAPSHOT ...................................................................................... 2-20
2.14 SHOW MO..................................................................................................... 2-22
2.15 SHOW NEVERSION ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.16 QUERY2........................................................................................................ 2-25
2.17 SHOW MOINFO............................................................................................. 2-27
2.18 DHCP............................................................................................................ 2-29
2.18.1 QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION ........................................................ 2-29
2.18.2 DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 2-30
2.18.3 CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 2-31
2.18.4 UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 2-32
2.19 MOVETO TARGETSUBNET ........................................................................... 2-34
Chapter 3 Dynamic Management .............................................................. 3-1

3.1 SDR Command.................................................................................................. 3-1
I
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.1 SNTP TIME ............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.2 SHOW TIME ............................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.3 SET TIME................................................................................................ 3-4
3.1.4 SWAP BOARD......................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.5 SHOW BOARD ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.6 SHOW PPP ............................................................................................3-11
3.1.7 SHOW TCP ........................................................................................... 3-12
3.1.8 SHOW IMA ............................................................................................ 3-14
3.1.9 SHOW BFD ........................................................................................... 3-15
3.1.10 SHOW HDLC ....................................................................................... 3-16
3.1.11 SHOW FIBER ...................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.12 SHOW AAL5........................................................................................ 3-20
3.1.13 SHOW PHY LAYER ............................................................................. 3-22
3.1.14 SHOW ETHERNET FAULT ................................................................... 3-24
3.1.15 SHOW ROUTE .................................................................................... 3-25
3.1.16 SHOW SCTP ....................................................................................... 3-27
3.1.17 SHUTDOWN SCTP.............................................................................. 3-29
3.1.18 SHOW FAN ......................................................................................... 3-30
3.1.19 START FAN DUST ............................................................................... 3-32
3.1.20 STOP FAN DUST................................................................................. 3-34
3.1.21 MANUAL CONTROL FAN..................................................................... 3-36
3.1.22 AUTO CONTROL FAN ......................................................................... 3-38
3.1.23 RESET AISG ....................................................................................... 3-40
3.1.24 SELFTEST AISG.................................................................................. 3-42
3.1.25 SHOW AISG ALARM............................................................................ 3-44
3.1.26 CLEAN AISG ALARM ........................................................................... 3-46
3.1.27 SET AISG MODE ................................................................................. 3-48
3.1.28 SEND AISG DATA................................................................................ 3-50
3.1.29 CALIBRATE AISG RET ........................................................................ 3-52
3.1.30 SET RET TILT...................................................................................... 3-54
3.1.31 SHOW RET TILT.................................................................................. 3-56
3.1.32 SHOW MODE ...................................................................................... 3-58
3.1.33 SET BAT TMA11 DATA ......................................................................... 3-60
3.1.34 SET BAT RET11 DATA ......................................................................... 3-63
3.1.35 SET BAT ACOM DATA ......................................................................... 3-66
3.1.36 SET BAT TMA20 DATA......................................................................... 3-69
3.1.37 SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA ........................................................ 3-72
II
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.38 SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA ........................................................ 3-74

3.1.39 SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA ....................................................... 3-76
3.1.40 SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA........................................................ 3-78
3.1.41 SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA ........................................... 3-79
3.1.42 SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA........................................................ 3-81
3.1.43 SET BAT RET20 DATA ......................................................................... 3-83
3.1.44 SHOW DEVICE.................................................................................... 3-86
3.1.45 SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE ............................................................. 3-88
3.1.46 SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE ....................................................... 3-90
3.1.47 DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE .................................................... 3-91
3.1.48 UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE .................................................... 3-93
3.1.49 SHOW USER INFO.............................................................................. 3-94
3.1.50 UPDATE USER INFO ........................................................................... 3-95
3.1.51 SHOW ACCESS LOG .......................................................................... 3-98
3.1.52 UPLOAD LOG.....................................................................................3-100
3.1.53 CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS ............................................................3-102
3.1.54 DISCONNECT LMT.............................................................................3-103
3.1.55 Set LMT Authorization .........................................................................3-106
3.1.56 SHOW LMT AUTHOR .........................................................................3-108
3.1.57 OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG................................................................. 3-110
3.1.58 CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG............................................................... 3-112
3.1.59 SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG................................................................ 3-113
3.1.60 SHOW NE CONNECTION ................................................................... 3-115
3.1.61 SHOW LINK........................................................................................ 3-117
3.1.62 LINK BREAK....................................................................................... 3-119
3.1.63 LINK RESTORE ..................................................................................3-121
3.1.64 BLOCK NE .........................................................................................3-122
3.1.65 UNBLOCK NE.....................................................................................3-124
3.1.66 SHOW NE ..........................................................................................3-126
3.1.67 RESET NE..........................................................................................3-127
3.1.68 RESET PRODUCT..............................................................................3-128
3.1.69 RESET RADIO....................................................................................3-130
3.1.70 RESET RGPS.....................................................................................3-132
3.1.71 RESET RF..........................................................................................3-134
3.1.72 RESET BASEBAND ............................................................................3-136
3.1.73 RESET BOARD ..................................................................................3-137
3.1.74 SHOW BOARD RADIO........................................................................3-139
III
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.75 RESET BOARD RADIO .......................................................................3-141

3.1.76 RESET MATE BOARD ........................................................................3-143
3.1.77 RESET HARDWARE ...........................................................................3-144
3.1.78 ALLOW WRITE ...................................................................................3-147
3.1.79 NOT ALLOW WRITE ...........................................................................3-148
3.1.80 BLOCK BOARD ..................................................................................3-150
3.1.81 UNBLOCK BOARD .............................................................................3-152
3.1.82 BLOCK RRU.......................................................................................3-154
3.1.83 UNBLOCK RRU ..................................................................................3-156
3.1.84 BLOCK BOARD RADIO.......................................................................3-157
3.1.85 UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO ..................................................................3-159
3.1.86 POWER ON........................................................................................3-160
3.1.87 POWER OFF ......................................................................................3-162
3.1.88 RESET POWER OFF ..........................................................................3-164
3.1.89 SHOW PM ..........................................................................................3-166
3.1.90 RESET FCE........................................................................................3-168
3.1.91 CLEAN DISK ......................................................................................3-170
3.1.92 QUERY DISK......................................................................................3-172
3.1.93 PA ON NEW .......................................................................................3-174
3.1.94 PA OFF NEW......................................................................................3-176
3.1.95 SHOW CARRIER NEW .......................................................................3-178
3.1.96 CAPTURE UES...................................................................................3-180
3.1.97 SHOW E1 ...........................................................................................3-183
3.1.98 SHOW T1 ...........................................................................................3-184
3.1.99 BLOCK E1 ..........................................................................................3-186
3.1.100 UNBLOCK E1 ...................................................................................3-188
3.1.101 SHOW STM1 ....................................................................................3-190
3.1.102 BLOCK STM1 ...................................................................................3-192
3.1.103 UNBLOCK STM1 ..............................................................................3-194
3.1.104 BLOCK CHANNEL STM1 ..................................................................3-196
3.1.105 UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1..............................................................3-197
3.1.106 SHOW CHANNEL STM1 ...................................................................3-199
3.1.107 SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE ............................................................3-201
3.1.108 SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS ........................................................3-203
3.1.109 SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN................................................................3-205
3.1.110 SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE ..............................................................3-207
3.1.111 SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA ..........................................................3-209
IV
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.112 SHOW BOARD MODE.......................................................................3-212

3.1.113 SHOW GAIN .....................................................................................3-213
3.1.114 SET GAIN .........................................................................................3-215
3.1.115 SET CLOCK......................................................................................3-217
3.1.116 SHOW CLOCK ..................................................................................3-219
3.1.117 SET RAS AZIMUTH...........................................................................3-220
3.1.118 SHOW RAS AZIMUTH.......................................................................3-223
3.2 LTE Command ................................................................................................3-225
3.2.1 FDD_STARTUPCELL............................................................................3-225
3.2.2 FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL .......................................................................3-226
3.2.3 FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS...................................................................3-227
3.2.4 FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES ....................................................................3-229
3.2.5 FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE ..............................................................3-231
3.2.6 TDD_STARTUPCELL............................................................................3-232
3.2.7 TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL .......................................................................3-234
3.2.8 TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS...................................................................3-235
3.2.9 TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES ....................................................................3-237
3.2.10 TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE .............................................................3-238
3.2.11 SHOW NE DB STATUS .......................................................................3-240
Chapter 4 Diagnose Management............................................................. 4-1

4.1 BOARD DIAGNOSE........................................................................................... 4-1
Chapter 5 Maintance Test Tools................................................................ 5-1

5.1 WB_BIND .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 WB_CMD .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 WB_SHOW........................................................................................................ 5-3
Chapter 6 Software Version Management................................................ 6-1

6.1 NODEB QUERYNEVERSION ............................................................................. 6-1
Chapter 7 LTE TDD ..................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 QUICKADDCELL ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 QUICKDELETECELL ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 CREATECATDD................................................................................................. 7-5
7.4 DELETECATDD ................................................................................................. 7-6
7.5 OPTIMIZE ORACLE........................................................................................... 7-7
V
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This page intentionally left blank.
VI
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
About This Manual

Purpose
This manual introduces the command of ZXSDR UniRAN TDD-LTE base station. It
describes in details the functions, formats, and input and output parameters so that the
users can master the commands.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for:
l
l
l
Maintenance Engineers
Commissioning Engineers
Network Operation Supervisors
What Is in This Manual

This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1, System Management
Describes the commands related with system

management
Chapter 2, Configuration Management
Describes the commands related with configuration

management
Chapter 3, Dynamic Management
Describes the commands related with SDR/LTE dynamic

management
Chapter 4, Diagnose Management
Describes the commands related with diagnose

management
Chapter 5, Maintenance Test Tools
Describes the commands related with maintenance test

tools
Chapter 6, Software Version
Describes the commands related with software version
Management
management
Chapter 7, LTE TDD
Describes the commands related with LTE TDD
Arguments in each command are case-sensitive.
Related Documentation
The following documentation is related to this manual:
ZXSDR UniRAN TDD-LTE Base Station Dynamic Data Management
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions.
I
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Note: provides additional information about a topic.
II
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 1
System Management
Table of Contents
GETCPURATIO .........................................................................................................1-1
GETRAMUSAGE .......................................................................................................1-2
GETHDUSAGE ..........................................................................................................1-3
GETDBRATIO ............................................................................................................1-4
GETHDUSAGEBYNAME ...........................................................................................1-5
1.1 GETCPURATIO
Function
This command gets the CPU usage of the OMM server. If the CPU usage exceeds 90%
and persists, the system requires troubleshooting.
This command applies when you want to check the CPU usage of the OMM server. The
operator can monitor the CPU usage by using third-party software or the OS Shell interface.
If the command is successfully executed, the current CPU usage of the server is displayed.
This operation is for query only and has no effect on the system.
Syntax
GETCPURATIO;
Input Parameters
This command has no input parameters.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the GETCPURATIO command, refer to Table
1-1.
Table 1-1 GETCPURATIO Command Output Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
Description
Type
Instance Count
CPURA-
If the command is successfully executed, the
Character
TION
current CPU usage of the server is displayed. If

the command fails, the system displays failure
information.
1-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
ZXSDR UniRAN Command Reference
Examples
The following example shows how to check the current CPU usage. In this example, the
CPU usage is 10%.
GETCPURATIO;
- System command CPU Ratio
10%
1.2 GETRAMUSAGE
Function
This command checks the RAM usage of the OMM server. If the RAM usage exceeds
90% and persists, the system requires troubleshooting.
This command applies when you want to check the RAM usage of the OMM server.
The operator can monitor the RAM usage by using third-party software or the OS Shell
interface.
If the command is successfully executed, the current RAM usage of the server is displayed.
Syntax
GETRAMUSAGE;
Input Parameters
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the GETRAMUSAGE command, refer to
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 GETRAMUSAGE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
Instance
Count
MEM
If the command is successfully executed, the current RAM
Com-
usage of the server is displayed.If the command fails, the
pound
system displays failure information.

1-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 1 System Management
Examples
The following example shows how to check the current RAM usage of the server. The
result is shown in a table.
GETRAMUSAGE;
- System command No. | Available Memory (KB) | System Memory (KB) | SWAP Memory (KB) | Used Memory
(KB)
1 6517792 8343704 8341808 5167720
Rows: 1
1.3 GETHDUSAGE
Function
This command checks the hard disk usage of the OMM server. If the hard disk usage
exceeds 95% and persists, the system requires troubleshooting.
This command applies when you want to check the hard disk usage of the OMM server.
The operator can monitor the hard disk usage by using third-party software or the OS Shell
interface.
If the command is successfully executed, the current hard disk usage of the server is
displayed.
Syntax
GETHDUSAGE;
Input Parameters
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the GETRAMUSAGE command, refer to
Table 1-3.
1-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 1-3 GETHDUSAGE Command Output Parameter Descriptions

N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Description
Type
Instance
Count
ter
1
HDINFO
If the command is successfully executed, the current
Com-
hard disk usage of the server is displayed.If the
pound
command fails, the system displays failure information.
Examples
The following example shows how to check the current hard disk usage of the server. The
result is shown in a table.
GETHDUSAGE;
- System command No. | Disk Descriptor | Disk Size (KB) | Used Size (KB)
1 /dev/sda1 413618724 82148496

2 /dev/sda3 51605464 3768216
Rows: 2
1.4 GETDBRATIO
Function
This command checks the tablespace usage of the current database used by the OMM
server. If the tablespace usage exceeds 95%, the system requires troubleshooting.
This command applies when you want to check the tablespace usage of the current
database used by the OMM server. The operator can monitor the tablespace ratio by
using third-party software or the DB interface.
If the command is successfully executed, the tablespace usage of the current database
used by the OMM server is displayed.
Syntax
GETDBRATIO;
Input Parameters
1-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 1 System Management
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the GETDBRATIO command, refer to Table
1-4.
Table 1-4 GETDBRATIO Command Output Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SPACE
Description
Type
Instance
Count
If the command is successfully executed, the
Com-
tablespace usage of the current database used by the
pound
OMM server is displayed.If the command fails, the

Examples
The following example shows how to check the tablespace usage of the current database
used by the OMM server. The result is shown in a table.
GETDBRATIO;
- System command No. | Space Name | Space Size (kb) | Space Used Size (kb) | Space Free Size (kb) | Free
Size Ratio
1 UEP 614400.0 115548.16 498851.84 81.19%

2 UEP_CAF_FM 614400.0 104120.31 510279.7 83.05%
Rows: 2
1.5 GETHDUSAGEBYNAME
Function
This command checks the specified hard disk usage. If the hard disk usage exceeds 95%
and persists, the system requires troubleshooting.
This command applies when you want to check the specified hard disk usage of the OMM
server. The operator can monitor the hard disk usage by using third-party software or the
OS Shell interface.
If the command is successfully executed, the specified hard disk usage of the OMM server
is displayed.
Syntax
GETHDUSAGEBYNAME:[DISKDESCRIPTOR=<DISKDESCRIPTOR>];
1-5
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the GETHDUSAGEBYNAME command, refer
to Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 GETRAMUSAGE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
o.
Rang-
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
DISKDE-
Specified hard disk name.
Char-
0~100
SCRIP-
All the hard disk names can
acter
TOR
be queried by executing
None
quired
GETHDUSAGE.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the GETHDUSAGEBYNAME command, refer
to Table 1-6.
Table 1-6 GETRAMUSAGE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Description
Type
Instance
Count
ter
1
HD-
If this command is successfully executed, the specified
Com-
INFO1
hard disk usage is displayed.If the command fails, the
pound
Examples
The following example shows how to check the usage of /dev/sda1. The result is shown
in a table.
GETHDUSAGEBYNAME:DISKDESCRIPTOR="/dev/sda1";
- System command No. | Disk Descriptor | Disk Size (KB) | Used Size (KB)
1 /dev/sda1 413618724 82148804
Rows: 1
1-6
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 2
Configuration Managment
Table of Contents
SYNC.........................................................................................................................2-1
ANTI...........................................................................................................................2-3
CREATE.....................................................................................................................2-4
UPDATE.....................................................................................................................2-6
DELETE .....................................................................................................................2-8
QUERY ......................................................................................................................2-9
MULTIREQUEST .....................................................................................................2-11
BACKUP ..................................................................................................................2-12
RESTORE................................................................................................................2-14
APPLY MUTEXRIGHT .............................................................................................2-16
RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT ........................................................................................2-17
KILL MUTEXRIGHT .................................................................................................2-18
QUERY SNAPSHOT ................................................................................................2-20
SHOW MO ...............................................................................................................2-22
SHOW NEVERSION ................................................................................................2-24
QUERY2 ..................................................................................................................2-25
SHOW MOINFO.......................................................................................................2-27
DHCP.......................................................................................................................2-29
MOVETO TARGETSUBNET ....................................................................................2-34
2.1 SYNC
Function
This command is used to synchronize NMS configurations to a BS. Four synchronization
types are provided, including Synchronize all data , Synchronize modified data,
Synchronize modified table-level data, and Generate synchronization file.
If the configurations on the NMS are modified, this command can be used to synchronize
the configurations to an NE.
After the command is successfully executed, the BS and NMS have the same
configurations.
2-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
l
l
Note:
Only the operators having the Synchronize all data or Synchronize modified data
permission can use this command.
After the Synchronize all data is successful, the BS is restarted, which leads to BS
service interruption. The service can be restored after the BS is successfully restarted.
Syntax
SYNC:[POS=[<SUBNET>][-<NE>]][,TYPE=<TYPE>][,SYNCTYPE=<SYNCTYPE>];
Input Parameters
For SYNC command input description, refer to Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 "SYNC" Command Input Parameters
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
ter
1
POS
Address combining the
Com-
subnet ID and NE ID
pound
None
None
Optional
1~3000
None
Optional
None
Optional
None
Re-
1~3000
type
SUB-
Subnet ID in operation
Charac-
0~2147
NET
configurations
ter type
400000
NE
NE ID in operation
Charac-
0~2147
configurations
ter type
400000
Radio standard, the value
Integer
0~1073
of which is the sum from
type
741824
TYPE
quired
adding the value of the

system to be synchronized
to the value 1 of the platform.
3
SYNC-
Synchronization
Integer
-100~10
TYPE
mode of configuration
type
00
None
Re-
quired
synchronization from the

NMS to the BS
Setting of the TYPE parameter:

l
l
l
l
l
l
1 indicates that the platform must be synchronized.

4 indicates that the CDMA standard must be synchronized.
8 indicates that the TDD LTE standard must be synchronized.
16 indicates that the FDD LTE standard must be synchronized.
32 indicates that the TD-SCDMA standard must be synchronized.
64 indicates that the GSM standard must be synchronized.
2-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 2 Configuration Managment
l
l
128 indicates that the UMTS standard must be synchronized.

255 indicates that all standards must be synchronized.
Setting of the SYNCTYPE parameter:

l
l
l
l
0
1
2
3
indicates Synchronize all data.

indicates Synchronize modified data.
indicates Synchronize modified table-level data.
indicates Generate synchronization file.
Output Parameters
For SYNC command output description, refer to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 "SYNC" Command Output Parameters
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
rame-
Instance
Count
ter
1
RE-
Returns the task ID. The operator can view the execution
Character
SULT
process details in the returned message.
type
Examples
Perform Synchronize all date on the FDD LTE with a subnet ID 0 and NE ID 1. After the
command is successful, the BS restarts and returns a task ID 42949676065. The operator
can view the execution process in the returned message.
SYNC:POS="0"-"1",TYPE="17",SYNCTYPE=0;
- System command [42949676065]
2.2 ANTI
Function
This command is used to upload configuration data from the BS to the NMS. After the
command is successfully executed, the NMS and BS have the same configurations. The
system is not affected.
Note:
Only the operators having the special operation configuration permission can use this
command.
2-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
ANTI:[POS=[<SUBNET>][-<NE>]];
Input Parameters
For ANTI command input description, refer to Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 "ANTI" Command Input Parameters
N-
Param-
o.
eter
POS
Description
Type
Range
Address combining the
Com-
1~21474
subnet ID and NE ID
pound
00000
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Optional
1~3000
None
Optional
Optional
Type
Instance
type
SUB-
Charac-
0~21474
NET
configurations
ter type
00000
NE
NE ID in operation
Charac-
0~21474
configurations
ter type
00000
Output Parameters
For ANTI command output description, refer to Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 "ANTI" Command Output Parameters
No.
Param-
Description
eter
1
Count
RE-
Returns a success or failure message. The operator can
Charac-
SULT
view the execution process in the returned message.
ter type
Example
Perform Configuration Data Upload from NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. After the
command is successfully executed, the NMS and BS have the same configurations, and
a success message is returned. If the execution fails, a failure message is returned.
ANTI:POS="0"-"0";
- System command All successful
2.3 CREATE
Function
This command creates configuration data records.
2-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command is used when configuration data requires to be added in base station
commissioning and routine maintenance.
The command structure is complicated. You can obtain the MML command by using either
of the following methods:
l
l
Create a piece of configuration data in GUI interface, and then click the button with
M next to the storage button
.
In the configuration management and data export, select export in MML format.
After the command is executed successfully, the system adds the corresponding
configuration data. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure cause is
returned.
The added configuration data has no effect on the system before it is synchronized to NEs.
After the added configuration data is synchronized to the NE, configuration data of different
MOCs have different effects on the system. The configuration data of some services may
cause NE restart or cell recreation. You should not synchronize the added configuration
data to the NEs unless absolutely necessary.
Syntax
CREATE:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,ATTRIBUTES=<ATTRIBUTES>][,EXTENDS
=<EXTENDS>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CREATE command, refer to Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 CREATE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
MOC
Management object name,
Char-
which can be obtained
acter
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
0~100
None
Optional
None
Optional
None
Optional
None
Optional
through the show mo

command.
2
MOI
Management object
Char-
0~21474
identifier
acter
00000
ATTRIB-
Attributse of the
Char-
0~21474
UTES
management object, which
acter
00000
can be obtained through

the show moinfo command.
4
EX-
Creates command-related
Char-
0~21474
TENDS
extension attributes
acter
00000
2-5
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CREATE command, refer to Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 CREATE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance Count
RESULT
Creation success or failure
Character
Examples
The following example shows how to create a subnet whose ID is 2, type is 1, and alias is
test. After the command is executed successfully, the information about creation success
and ID of the created subnet are returned.
CREATE:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=2",ATTRIBUTES="SUBNETWOR
KTYPE=1,SubNetwork=2,USERLABEL=Test";
- System command Succeeding in creating.
SubNetwork=2
2.4 UPDATE
Function
This command modifies configuration data records.
This command can be used when configuration data requires to be modified in routine
maintenance.
The command structure is complicated. You can obtain the MML modification command
in one of the following ways:
l
l
Modify a piece of configuration data in GUI interface, and then click the button with
M next to the storage button
.
After the data is modified in batches and saved, the corresponding MML modification
command is available in the pop-up dialog box.
After the command is executed successfully, the configuration data is modified. If the
command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure reason is returned and the configuration
data is not modified.
Impact on the system: The modified configuration data has no effect on the system
before it is synchronized to the NE. After the modified configuration data is synchronized
to the NE, configuration data of different MOCs have different effects on the system. The
configuration data of some services may cause NE restart or cell recreation. Therefore,
be cautious.
2-6
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
UPDATE:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,ATTRIBUTES=<ATTRIBUTES>][,EXTENDS
=<EXTENDS>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UPDATE command, refer to Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 UPDATE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
MOC
Char-
which can be obtained through
acter
Default-
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
0~100
None
Optional
Char-
0~2147
None
Optional
acter
400000
None
Optional
None
Optional
the show mo command.

2
MOI
Management object identifier
ATTRIB-
Attribute of the management
Char-
0~2147
UTES
object, which can be obtained
acter
400000
Char-
0~2147
acter
400000
through the show moinfo

command.
4
EX-
Extension attribute
TENDS
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UPDATE command, refer to Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 UPDATE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Number of objects updated successfully is returned.
Character
Examples
The following example shows how to modify the NE alias of subnet 2 to update. After the
update is successful, the result is 1 instance(s) of SubNetwork updated..
UPDATE:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=2",ATTRIBUTES="USERLABEL
=update";
- System command 1 instance(s) of SubNetwork updated.
2-7
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2.5 DELETE
Function
This command deletes configuration data records.
This command can be used when configuration data requires to be deleted in routine
maintenance.
After the data is modified in batches and saved, the corresponding MML deletion command
is available in the pop-up dialog box
After the command is executed successfully, the configuration data is deleted.
Impact on the system: The deleted configuration data has no effect on the system before
it is synchronized to the NE. After the deleted configuration data is synchronized to
the NE, configuration data of different MOCs have different effects on the system. The
be cautious.
Syntax
DELETE:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,EXTENDS=<EXTENDS>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the DELETE command, refer to Table 2-9.
Table 2-9 DELETE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
Default
Op-
Instance
Value
tional or
Count
Not
1
MOC
Char-
which can be obtained
acter
0~100
None
Optional
None
Optional
None
Optional
through the show mo

command.
2
MOI
EX-
Management object
Char-
0~21474
identifier
acter
00000
Extension attribute
Char-
0~21474
acter
00000
TENDS
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the DELETE command, refer to Table 2-10.
2-8
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-10 DELETE Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
The number of records of deleted objects is output.
Char-
acter
Examples
The following example shows how to delete NE 4 in subnet 0. After the command is
successfully executed, the returned result is 1 instance(s) of NEManagedElement
deleted.
DELETE:MOC=" NEManagedElement",MOI="SubNetwork=0,NE=4";
- System command Are you sure to delete it?
1 instance(s) of NEManagedElement deleted.
2.6 QUERY
Function
This command queries configuration data of the network management modification area
through actual value filtering.
This command can be used when configuration data of the modification area requires to
be queried in routine maintenance. If the configuration data of the snapshot area requires
to be queried, the QUERY SNAPSHOT command can be used. If the interface values
require to be filtered for query, the QUERY2 command can be used.
After the command is executed successfully, if the specified query object in the system
exists, the configuration data is displayed in list format.
Syntax
QUERY:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,ATTRIBUTES=<ATTRIBUTES>][,EXTENDS
=<EXTENDS>][,WHERE=<WHERE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the QUERY command, refer to Table 2-11.
2-9
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-11 QUERY Command Input Parameter Descriptions

N-
Param-
o.
eter
MOC
Description
Type
Char-
acter
Range
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
0~100
None
Optional
Char-
0~2147
None
Optional
acter
400000
0~1000
None
Optional
1~500
Char-
0~2147
None
Optional
acter
400000
None
Optional

2
MOI
ATTRI-
Attribute name, which can be
Char-
BUTES
obtained through the show
acter
moinfo command.
4
EX-
Extension attribute
TENDS
5
WHER-
Filtering condition, in format
Char-
0~2147
of "attribute name=attribute
acter
400000
value". For the multi-condition

filtering, use "and" or "or". For
example, "attribute 1=attribute
1 and attribute 2= attribute 2 or
attribute 3= attribute 3". The
attribute value can be only the
actual value of data storage.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the QUERY command, refer to Table 2-12.
Table 2-12 QUERY Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
Instance
Count
RE-
The record information of the specified query object
Charac-
SULT
is output.
ter
Examples
The following example shows how to query detailed information about subnet 1. After the
command is successfully executed, the management object ID, user ID, and subnet type
information are returned.
QUERY:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=1",ATTRIBUTES="USERLABEL
"&"SUBNETWORKTYPE";
- System command 2-10
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Managed Element Identification(MOI)

Type(SUBNETWORKTYPE)
User
Label(USERLABEL)
SubNetwork
SubNetwork=1 Test 1
2.7 MULTIREQUEST
Function
This command creates, modifies or deletes configuration data records. This command is
used when configuration data requires to be updated in base station commissioning and
routine maintenance.
After the command is executed successfully, the system updates the corresponding
configuration data. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure cause is
returned. The updated configuration data has no effect on the system before it is
synchronized to NEs. After the updated configuration data is synchronized to the
NE, configuration data of different MOCs have different effects on the system. The
configuration data of some services may cause NE restart or cell recreation. You should
not synchronize the added configuration data to the NEs unless absolutely necessary.
Command
MULTIREQUEST:CMD=< CMD >;
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 2-13 shows the input parameters of MULTIREQUEST.
Table 2-13 MULTIREQUEST Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
CMD
Command
Instance
Count
STRING
1~214740
Required
1~10000
0000
Output Parameters
Table 2-14 shows the output parameters of MULTIREQUEST.
Table 2-14 MULTIREQUEST OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
2-11
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Example
The following example shows how to create a CCC board. After the command is executed
successfully, the information about creation success.
MULTIREQUEST:CMD="CREATE:MOC="PlugInUnit",MOI="SubNetwork=0,NE=0,C
onfigSet=0,Equipment=1,Rack=1,SubRack=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1",ATTRIBUTES="PlugI
nUnit=1";"&"CREATE:MOC="SdrDeviceGroup",MOI="SubNetwork=0,NE=0,ConfigSe
t=0,Equipment=1,Rack=1,SubRack=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1,SdrDeviceGroup=1",ATTRIBU
TES="radioMode=0,SdrDeviceGroup=1,productData=(OBJ)[{productNumber=12290,prod
uctName=CCC}],functionMode=0";";
- System command Succeeded in operating.
-
2.8 BACKUP
Function
This command backs up the system configuration data to the storage file.
In the routine maintenance, you can use this command to back up the system configuration
data to the file so that you can use the RESTORE command to recover the backup file in
the system when errors occur in the following configuration maintenance process.
After the command is executed successfully, the system configuration data is backed up
to the file, and the path where the backup result file is stored is output.
Impact on the system: none.
Syntax
BACKUP:POS=[<SUBNET>][-<NE>][,FILENAME=<FILENAME>][,DESC=<DESC>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the BACKUP command, refer to Table 2-15.
Table 2-15 BACKUP Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
POS
Logical address combined by
Com-
SUBNET and NE. When the
pound
None
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Op-
1~3000
None
tional
POS parameter is not input,

all OMM configuration data is
backed up. When only subnet
2-12
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Op-
parameter is input, all NE data

in the subnet is backed up.
SUB-
Char-
1~2147
NET
configurations
acter
400000
NE
NE ID in operation
Char-
1~2147
configurations
acter
400000
FILE-
Prefix of the file
Char-
0~100
NAME
name,for example,
acter
None
tional
None
Op-
tional
Config-
Op-
data
tional
None
Op-
_20110711_130455.zip
3
DESC
Summary description
Char-
information on the backup
acter
0~1000
tional
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the BACKUP command, refer to Table 2-16.
Table 2-16 BACKUP Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
Instance
Count
RE-
Operation result. If the operation is successful, the
Char-
SULT
storage path information of the backup file is output. If the
acter
operation is unsuccessful, the failure reason is output (if

NE exclusion right is unavailable).
Examples
The following example shows how to back up configuration data of subnet 0 and NE 0 to
the file. After the operation is successful, the path where the backup file is stored in the
server is returned.
BACKUP:POS="0"-"0", FILENAME="test",DESC="NE 0~0 configuration data, all functi
on services are normal.";
- System command Successful [2]
File path (Server)
/home/oracle/netnumen/AutoInstall/ums/ums-svr/cmdata/cmbak/test_20121016_152602
.zip
-
2-13
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2.9 RESTORE
Function
This command restores the configuration data backup file to the system.
In the routine maintenance, if the data is configured incorrectly, you can use this command
to restore the backup data file to the system.
After the command is executed successfully, the result information of the restore operation
(success/failure) is output.
Impact on the system: The restored data has no effect on the system before it is
synchronized to the NE. After the restored configuration data is synchronized to the
NE, configuration data of different MOCs have different effects on the system. The
be cautious.
Syntax
RESTORE:[POS=[<SUBNET>][-<NE>]][,FILENAME=<FILENAME>][,TOEDITOR=<TO
EDITOR>][,TOSNAPSHOT=<TOSNAPSHOT>][,COMPLETE=<COMPLETE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESTORE command, refer to Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 RESTORE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
POS
Description
Type
Logic address of the operation
Com-
NE, which is combined with
plex
Range
None
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Op-
1~3000
None
tional
network number and NE

number. When this parameter
is not input, all NEs in the
backup file are restored.
SUB-
Charac-
1~2147
NET
configurations
ter
400000
NE
NE ID in operation
Charac-
1~2147
configurations
ter
400000
FILE-
Name of the restore file,
Charac-
1~1000
NAME
which must be stored in
ter
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Re-
quired
the ums-svr/cmdata/cmbak
direcotry of the system server.
2-14
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Param-
o.
eter
Description
Type
Range
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
1
TOEDI-
Modification area data is
Enu-
Refer
EDI-
Re-
TOR
restored. You can select the
mera-
to Table
TOR
quired
data from the snapshot area
tion (re-
2-18
(modi-
of modification area of the
covery
fication
backup file for restore.
mode)
area)
TOS-
The snapshot area data is
Bool
NAP-
restored. When you select
SHOT
TRUE, the data is restored
TRUE-
TRUE
FALSE
Re-
quired
from the snapshot area of the

backup file to the snapshot
area of the system. When you
select FALSE, the data in the
snapshot area of the system
is not changed.
COM-
Complete recovery (the
PLETE
original data in the system is
Bool
TRUE-
FALSE
FALSE
Op-
tional
cleared up and restored from

the file).
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the restore type parameter, refer to Table 2-18.
Table 2-18 Restore Types
Macro
Description
EDITOR
Restores from the modification area.
SNAPSHOT
Restores from the snapshot area.
NONE
Modification area data is not restored.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESTORE command, refer to Table 2-19.
Table 2-19 RESTORE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
The result of operation of RESTORE is output. When the
Char-
command is executed successfully, the information about
acter
"Restore NE succeeded" is returned. When the command

is executed unsuccessfully, the detailed failure reason
is returned.
2-15
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to restore the configuration data of subnet 0 NE 0 from
the modification area of the backup file to that of the system and from the snapshot area
of the backup file to that of the system. During the restore process, the original NE is not
deleted. After the operation is successful, the information about Restore NE succeeded
is returned.
RESTORE:POS="0"-"0",FILENAME="Test_20120614_220124.zip",TOEDITOR=EDITO
R,TOSNAPSHOT=TRUE,COMPLETE=FALSE;
- System command Restore NE succeeded.
2.10 APPLY MUTEXRIGHT

Function
This command applies NE mutex right by the local client terminal.
During the routine maintenance, when multiple client terminals modify configuration data
at the same time, data can be disordered. To avoid this problem, the mutex right of the NE
must be applied before the configuration data is modified.
After the command is executed successfully, the result information of the mutex right
application operation (success/failure) is output.
Syntax
APPLY MUTEXRIGHT:[SUBNET=<SUBNET>][,NE=<NE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the APPLY MUTEXRIGHT command, refer to
Table 2-20.
Table 2-20 APPLY MUTEXRIGHT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
Description
Type
Range
SUB-
Charac-
0~2147
NET
configurations
ter
400000
NE
NE ID in operation
Charac-
0~2147
configurations
ter
400000
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
None
Optional
None
Optional
2-16
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the APPLY MUTEXRIGHT command, refer
to Table 2-21.
Table 2-21 APPLY MUTEXRIGHT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
Instance
Count
RE-
The result of operation of applying metex right is output.
Char-
SULT
When the command is executed successfully, the information
acter
about "Succeeded in applying mutex right" is returned. When

the command is executed unsuccessfully, the detailed failure
reason is returned.
Examples
The following example shows how to apply the mutex right of subnet 0 NE 0. If the
command is executed successfully, the information about Succeeded in applying mutex
right is returned.
APPLY MUTEXRIGHT:SUBNET="0",NE="0";
- System command Succeeded in applying mutex right.
2.11 RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT

Function
This command releases the NE mutex right occupied by the local client terminal.
After executing the APPLY MUTEXRIGHT command to apply the mutex right, you can
execute this command to release the mutex right. This command can release only the
mutex right applied by the local client terminal. If the mutex rights applied by other client
terminals require to be released, you should execute the KILL MUTEXRIGHT command.
release operation (success/failure) is output.
Syntax
RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT:[SUBNET=<SUBNET>][,NE=<NE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT command, refer
to Table 2-22.
2-17
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-22 RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT Command Input Parameter Descriptions

N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Optional
None
Optional
ter
1
SUB-
Char-
0~214740
NET
configurations
acter
0000
NE ID in operation
Char-
0~214740
configurations
acter
0000
NE
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT command,
refer to Table 2-23.
Table 2-23 RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
Description
Type
o.
eter
RE-
The result of operation of releasing metex right is
Char-
SULT
output. When the command is executed successfully, the
acter
Instance
Count
1
information about "Succeeded in releasing mutex right" is

returned. When the command is executed unsuccessfully,
the detailed failure reason is returned.
Examples
The following example shows how to release the mutex right of subnet 0 NE 0. If the
command is executed successfully, the information about Succeeded in releasing mutex
right is returned.
RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT:SUBNET="0",NE="0";
- System command Succeeded in releasing mutex right.
2.12 KILL MUTEXRIGHT

Function
This command releases the NE mutex rights occupied by other client terminals forcibly.
When mutex rights applied by other client terminals are not released, and the local client
terminal requires to modify the configuration data, the command can be used to release
the mutex rights forcibly. If the NE mutex right occupied by the local client terminal requires
to be released, you can execute the RELEASE MUTEXRIGHT command.
2-18
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
release operation (success/failure) is output.
Syntax
KILL MUTEXRIGHT:[SUBNET=<SUBNET>][,NE=<NE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the KILL MUTEXRIGHT command, refer to
Table 2-24.
Table 2-24 KILL MUTEXRIGHT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
Char-
0~21474
NET
configurations
acter
00000
NE
NE ID in operation
Char-
0~21474
configurations
acter
00000
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Optional
None
Optional
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the KILL MUTEXRIGHT command, refer to
Table 2-25.
Table 2-25 KILL MUTEXRIGHT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
The result of operation of releasing metex right is
Char-
output. When the command is executed successfully,
acter
the information about "Succeeded in releasing mutex

right" is returned. When the command is executed
unsuccessfully, the detailed failure reason is returned.
Examples
The following example shows how to release the mutex right of subnet 0 NE 0 forcibly.
If the command is executed successfully, the information about Succeeded in releasing
mutex right is returned.
KILL MUTEXRIGHT:SUBNET="0",NE="0";
- System command Succeeded in releasing mutex right.
2-19
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2.13 QUERY SNAPSHOT

Function
This command queries configuration data of the snapshot area.
This command can be used when configuration data of the snapshot area requires to be
queried in routine maintenance. If the configuration data of the modification area requires
to be queried, the QUERY command can be used.
Syntax
QUERY
SNAPSHOT:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,ATTRIBUTES=<ATTRIBUTES
>][,EXTENDS=<EXTENDS>][,WHERE=<WHERE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the QUERY SNAPSHOT command, refer to
Table 2-26.
Table 2-26 QUERY SNAPSHOT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
MOC
Char-
acter
0~100
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Op-
None
tional

2
MOI
Char-
0~2147
acter
400000
0~1000
ATTRIB-
Char-
UTES
obtained through the show
acter
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
1~100
tional
moinfo command.
4
EX-
Extension attribute
TENDS
Char-
0~2147
acter
400000
None
Op-
tional
2-20
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
WHERE
Char-
0~2147
acter
400000
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Op-
None
tional

1 and attribute 2= attribute 2
or attribute 3= attribute 3". The
actual value of data storage.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the QUERY SNAPSHOT command, refer to
Table 2-27.
Table 2-27 QUERY SNAPSHOT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
is output.
ter
Examples
command is successfully executed, the object ID, user ID, and subnet type information are
returned.
QUERY SNAPSHOT:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=1",ATTRIBUTES="USE
RLABEL"&"SUBNETWORKTYPE";
Managed
Element
Identification(MOI)
Managed
Element
Identification
ab.(SMOI) User Label(USERLABEL) SubNetwork ID(SubNetwork) SubNetwork
- System command SubNetwork=0 0 1 0 1
2-21
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2.14 SHOW MO
Function
This command shows information of all management objects included in the NE version.
This command is used to show information of all management objects included in the NE
version during the routine maintenance.
After the command is executed, information of all management objects included in the NE
version is output.
Syntax
SHOW MO:VERSION=<VERSION>,RADIOMODE=<RADIOMODE>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW MO command, refer to Table 2-28.
Table 2-28 SHOW MO Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Typ-
eter
Range
VER-
NE version number, which can
Ch-
0~214
SION
be obtained through the SHOW
ar-
74000
NEVERSION command.
ac-
00
De-
Op-
Inst-
fault
tional
ance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Re-
quired
ter
2
RADIO-
Radio mode. For the multi-mode
Inte-
0~655
MODE
NE, the system prompts that this
ger
35
None
Op-
tional
parameter should be input. The

parameter value can be obtained from
the prompt information.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW MO command, refer to Table 2-29.
2-22
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-29 SHOW MO Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Pa-
Description
Type
rame-
Instance
Count
ter
1
MOCS
MO object combined with parameters NAME and DESC.
Com-
Information of all management objects included in the
plex
1~1000
NE version is output.
NAME
MO name
Charac-
ter
DESC
MO description
Charac-
ter
Enumerate Description
Table 2-30 describes Radio Mode Enumerate Type.
Table 2-30 Radio
Macro
Meanings
ALL
UMTS
GSM
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
16
LTE FDD
32
LTE TDD
Examples
The following example shows how to query information of all management objects whose
NE version number is UniRan 12.3(GU V4.12.10.13). The query result lists names and
descriptions of all management objects whose NE version number is UniRan 12.3(GU
V4.12.10.13).
SHOW MO:VERSION="UniRan 12.3(GU V4.12.10.13)";
- System command Name|Description
SubNetwork sub network

NEManagedElement Management NE
ConfigSet Base station set
2-23
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
ManagedElement Management NE
Equipment Equipment
TransportNetwork Transmission network
Operator Operator
VsOam Operation mainenance
SystemFuctions System parameters
2.15 SHOW NEVERSION

Function
This command checks all NE version numbers supported by the current system.
This command is used to show all NE version numbers supported by the current system
during the routine maintenance.
After this command is successfully, all NE versions supported by the system are output.
Syntax
SHOW NEVERSION;
Input Parameters
This command has no input parameter.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW NEVERSION command, refer to
Table 2-31.
Table 2-31 SHOW NEVERSION Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
VER-
All NE version numbers supported by the current
Char-
1~1000
SION
system
acter
ter
1
Examples
The following example shows how to query all NE version numbers supported by the
system. The returned result lists all NE versions numbers supported by the current system.
SHOW NEVERSION;
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
NE version
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.20.50.30)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.30.20.00B37)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.20.50.08)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.20.50.20)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.30.20.00B36)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.30.20.00B35)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.10.20.30P20)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.20.30.10)
UniRan 12.4(LTE V3.30.20.00B38)
-
2.16 QUERY2
Function
This command queries configuration data of the network management modification area
through interface display value filtering.
This command can be used when configuration data of the modification area requires to
be queried in routine maintenance. If the configuration data of the snapshot area requires
to be queried, the QUERY SNAPSHOT command can be used. If the actual values require
to be filtered for query, the QUERY command can be used.
Syntax
QUERY2:[MOC=<MOC>][,MOI=<MOI>][,ATTRIBUTES=<ATTRIBUTES>][,WHERE
=<WHERE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the QUERY2 command, refer to Table 2-32.
2-25
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-32 QUERY2 Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
MOC
Management object name, which
Char-
can be obtained through the show
acter
0~100
De-
Op-
In-
fault
tional
stance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Op-
tional
mo command.
2
MOI
Char-
0~214
acter
74000
None
Op-
tional
00
3
ATTRIB-
Char-
0~100
UTES
obtained through the show moinfo
acter
Char-
0~214
acter
74000
None
Op-
1~500
tional
command.
4
EX-
Extension attribute
TENDS
None
Op-
tional
00
5
WHERE
Char-
0~214
acter
74000
None
Op-
tional
00

1 and attribute 2= attribute 2
or attribute 3= attribute 3". The
value displayed on the interface.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the QUERY2 command, refer to Table 2-33.
Table 2-33 QUERY2 Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
is output.
ter
Examples
command is successfully executed, the object ID, user ID, and subnet type information are
returned.
QUERY2:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=1",ATTRIBUTES="USERLABEL
"&"SUBNETWORKTYPE";
2-26
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
- System command Managed Element Identification(MOI)

User
Label(USERLABEL)
SubNetwork
SubNetwork=1 Test 1
2.17 SHOW MOINFO

Function
This command shows detailed information about management objects, including attribute
names, attribute value ranges, and attribute default values of the management objects.
During the routine maintenance, this command is used to show detailed information of
management objects and instances of the CREATE, UPDATE, DELETE, and QUERY
commands of the management objects.
Syntax
SHOW MOINFO:MOC=<MOC>[,VERSION=<VERSION>][,RADIOMODE=<RADIOMO
DE>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW MOINFO command, refer to Table
2-34.
Table 2-34 SHOW MOINFO Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Pa-
De-
Op-
Inst-
rame-
fault
tional
ance
ter
Value
or Not
Count
None
Re-
MOC
Description
Type
Range
MO version number, which can be
Cha-
0~214
obtained through the SHOW MO
rac-
74000
command.
ter
00
VER-
NE version number, which can
Cha-
0~214
SION
be obtained through the SHOW
rac-
74000
NEVERSION command.
ter
00
RA-
Radio mode. For the multi-mode NE,
Inte-
0~655
DIOM-
the system prompts that this parameter
ger
35
ODE
should be input. The parameter value
quired
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
can be obtained from the prompt

information.
2-27
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW MOINFO command, refer to Table
2-35.
Table 2-35 SHOW MOINFO Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
FIELDS
Instance
Count
Management object attribute, which is combined with
Complex
1~1000
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
1~1000
Complex
NAME, DESC, TYPE, OPTIONAL, and DEFAULT.

NAME
Attribute name, which can be defined by the MO

document.
DESC
Attribute description, which can be defined by the

MO document.
TYPE
Attribute type, which can be defined by the MO

document.
OP-
Optional or not, including true for optional and false
TIONAL
for Required, which can be defined by the MO

document.
DE-
Default value, which can be defined by the MO
FAULT
document.
CMD
Command types, including CREATE, UPDATE,

DELETE, and QUERY.
EXAM-
Instances of the CREATE, DELETE, UPDATE, and
PLES
QUERY commands.
Examples
The following example shows how to query the detailed information about the subnet
management objects. The returned result lists the names, descriptions, types, value
ranges, options, and default values of all attributes of the management object SubNetwork,
and lists the instances of the CREATE,UPDATE, DELETE, and QUERY commands
corresponding to the management object SubNetwork.
SHOW MOINFO:MOC="SubNetwork";
- System command Name |Description |Type |Range |Optional |Default Value
USERLABEL User ID string [0..128] true

SubNetwork Subnet ID long [0..999999] false
SUBNETWORKTYPE Subnet type long [1..1] true 1
2-28
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Command | Instance
CREATE
CREATE:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=?",ATTRIBUTES="SubNetwork=?,";
DELETE DELETE:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=?";
UPDATE
UPDATE:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=?",ATTRIBUTES="SubNetwork=?";
QUERY QUERY:MOC="SubNetwork",MOI="SubNetwork=?";
2.18 DHCP
2.18.1 QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION
Function
This command queries DHCP configuration data records.
Command
QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION;
Output Parameters
Table 2-36 shows the output parameters of QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION.
Table 2-36 QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
COMPLEX
Result
1~1000000
EID
STRING
EID
NE
INT
NE ID
NENAME
STRING
NE Name
VLANID
INT
VLAN ID
NEEXTERNALIP
ADDRESS
NE External IP
NESUBNET-
ADDRESS
NE Subnet Mask
MASK
7
NEGATEWAY
ADDRESS
NE Gateway
OMCSERVERIP
ADDRESS
OMC Server IP
LASTTIME
STRING
Last Modified
Time
2-29
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Example
QUERY DHCP CONFIGURATION;
No. |EID|NE ID|NE name |VLAN ID|NE external IP| NE subnet mask |NE gateway|OMC
server IP|Last Modified Time
- System command 1 06:15
Rows: 1
2.18.2 DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION

Function
This command deletes DHCP configuration data records.
Command
DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION:EID=<EID>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 2-37 shows the input parameters of DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION.
Table 2-37 DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
EID
EID
Instance
Count
STRING
1~40
Required
1~1000
Output Parameters
Table 2-38 shows the output parameters of DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION.
Table 2-38 DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Example
The following example shows how to delete EID 4432153545641 . After the command is
successfully executed, the returned result is "1 record(s) deleted".
DELETE DHCP CONFIGURATION:EID=4432153545641;
- System command 1 record(s) deleted.
2-30
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2.18.3 CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION

Function
This command creates DHCP configuration data records.
Command
CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,CCS
LOTNO=<CCSLOTNO>[,EID=<EID>][,NENAME=<NENAME>][,VLANID=<VLANID>][,NE
EXTERNALIP=<NEEXTERNALIP>][,NESUBNETMASK=<NESUBNETMASK>][,NEGATE
WAY=<NEGATEWAY>,][OMCSERVERIP=<OMCSERVERIP>];
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 2-39 shows the input parameters of CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION.
Table 2-39 CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET-
Instance
Count
Subnet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
WORK
2
NE
999
3
CC-
CC slot
SLOTNO
No.
INT
1~255
Required
EID
EID
STRING
1~40
Optional
NENAME
NE name
STRING
0~80
Optional
VLANID
VLAN ID
INT
0~65535
Optional
NEEX-
NE
AD-
Optional
TER-
external
DRESS
NALIP
IP
NESUB-
NE subnet
AD-
Optional
NET-
mask
DRESS
NEGATE-
NE
AD-
Optional
WAY
gateway
DRESS
OMCSE-
OMC
AD-
Optional
RVERIP
server IP
DRESS
MASK
9
10
Output Parameters
Table 2-40 shows the output parameters of CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION.
2-31
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-40 CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION OUTPUT PARAMETERS

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Example
The following example shows how to create a DHCP configuration data record whose
subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0, CC slot No. = 1, EID = 255898600005, NE name = test, VLAN
ID = 65535, NE IP address of 20.2.0.5, NE subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, NE gateway =
20.2.0.1, OMC server address = 20.2.0.100. After the command is executed successfully,
the information about creation success is returned.
CREATE DHCP CONFIGURATION:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,CCSLOTNO=1,EID="255
898600005",NENAME="test",VLANID=65535,NEEXTERNALIP="20.2.0.5",NESUBNETM
ASK="255.255.0.0",NEGATEWAY="20.2.0.1",OMCSERVERIP="20.2.0.100";
- System command Succeeded in creating.
Rows: 1
2.18.4 UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION

Function
This command modifies DHCP configuration data records.
When DHCP configuration data needs to be modified during commissioning of a base
station, use this command.
Syntax
UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,C
CSLOTNO=<CCSLOTNO>[,EID=<EID>][,NENAME=<NENAME>][,VLANID=<VLANI
D>][,NEEXTERNALIP=<NEEXTERNALIP>][,NESUBNETMASK=<NESUBNETMASK
>][,NEGATEWAY=<NEGATEWAY>][,OMCSERVERIP=<OMCSERVERIP>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION
command, refer to Table 2-41.
2-32
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-41 Input Parameter Descriptions for the UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION
Command
No.
Parameter
Descrip-
Type
Range
tion
1
SUBNET-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Subnet ID
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
NE ID
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
WORK
2
NE
999
3
CC-
CC slot
SLOTNO
No.
EID
Electronic
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Character
0~40
65535
Optional
serial
number
5
NENAME
NE Name
Character
0~80
None
Optional
VLANID
VLAN ID.
Integer
0~65535
None
Optional
NEEX-
IP address
Address
None
Optional
TERNALIP
of the NE
NESUB-
Subnet
Address
None
Optional
NETMASK
mask of
Address
None
Optional
Address
None
Optional
the NE
9
10
NEGATE-
NE
WAY
gateway
OMCSER-
IP address
VERIP
of the
OMC
server
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION
Table 2-42 Output Parameter Descriptions for the UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION
Command
N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Type
Description
Instance Count
RE-
Char-
Execution result, which contains the
SULT
acter
success or failure information.
ter
1
2-33
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
This example shows how to modify DHCP configurations (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0, CC
slot No. = 1, EID = 255898600005, NE name = test, VLAN ID = 65535, NE IP address
of 20.2.0.5, NE subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, NE gateway = 20.2.0.1, OMC server address
= 20.2.0.100). The command is executed successfully, and the result is that a record is
modified.
UPDATE DHCP CONFIGURATION:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,CCSLOTNO=1,EID="255
898600005",NENAME="test",VLANID=65535,NEEXTERNALIP="20.2.0.5",NESUBNET
MASK="255.255.0.0",NEGATEWAY="20.2.0.1",OMCSERVERIP="20.2.0.100";
- System Command Successful
-
2.19 MOVETO TARGETSUBNET

Function
This command moves an NE to the target subnet.
Syntax
BLOCK UCELL:SRCSUBNET=<SRCSUBNET>,SRCNE=<SRCNE>,TARGETSUBNET
=<TARGETSUBNET>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the MOVETO TARGETSUBNET command,
Table 2-43 Input Parameter Descriptions for the MOVETO TARGETSUBNET Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SRCSUB-
Source subnet ID
Integer
NET
2
SRCNE
0~99999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
9
Source NE ID
Integer
0~99999
None
9999
3
TARGET-
Target subnet ID
Integer
SUBNET
Re-
quired
0~99999
9
quired
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the MOVETO TARGETSUBNET command,
2-34
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 2-44 Output Parameter Descriptions for the MOVETO TARGETSUBNET Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Failure reason. If the operation fails, this field shows
Character
failure details, otherwise, it shows ---.
Examples
MOVETO TARGETSUBNET:SRCSUBNET="0",SRCNE="0",TARGETSUBNET="0";
- System command No. |Operation Result | Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
2-35
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
2-36
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 3
Dynamic Management
Table of Contents
SDR Command ..........................................................................................................3-1
LTE Command .......................................................................................................3-225
3.1 SDR Command

3.1.1 SNTP TIME
Function
This command forced the base station to get time from the SNTP server.
This command applies when the time server is abnormal, and the base station has tried
automatic calibration the maximum number of times but fails. After the time server is
repaired, time synchronization should be triggered manually.
When there is time difference between the base station and time server, synchronize the
time manually.
If the command is successfully executed, the time of the base station and time server is
consistent.
Impact on the system: If the system time is modified, any time-related functions may
be abnormal. For example, the report time of alarms, signaling trace, and performance
statistics uses the new system time. If the modified time is significantly different from the
original time, the accuracy of signaling trace and performance statistics may be affected.
Syntax
SNTP TIME:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SNTP TIME command, refer to Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 SNTP TIME Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Operated sub-
NET
network ID
Integer
0~999999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
3-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
2
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~9999999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
Required
99
3
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SNTP TIME command, refer to Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 SNTP TIME Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Returns a success or failure message.
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-3 describes Radio Enumerate Type.
Table 3-3 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to synchronize the SNTP server time to the NE
(sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SNTP TIME: SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason
1 Success
3-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 3 Dynamic Management
Rows: 1
3.1.2 SHOW TIME

Function
This command queries the current time of the NE, and displays the configured time zone
from the database.
This command applies when you want to get the current system time of the base station.
After the command is successfully executed, the current time and time zone of the base
station are displayed.
Syntax
SHOW TIME:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW TIME command, refer to Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 SHOW TIME Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
ter
1
SUB-
Operated
NET
sub-network ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Required
999
3
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW TIME command, refer to Table
3-5.
Table 3-5 SHOW TIME Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
3-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
3
TIME
Instance
Count
Current time
Charac-
ter
4
ZONE
Current time zone
Charac-
ter
Table 3-6 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the current time of the NE (subnet ID = 0, and
NE ID = 0).The result is shown as follows:
SHOW TIME:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Failure Reason | Time | Time Zone
1 Successful 1984-04-15 14:15:58 GMT - 3:30
Rows: 1
3.1.3 SET TIME

Function
This command sets the system time of the NE. The daylight saving time and time zone is
not considered.
3-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command is used when the base station time requires to be modified forcibly.
After the command is successfully executed, the base station time is set.
Impact on the system: The system time is updated forcibly. The modification of the
system time may cause abnormality of some functions related to the base station time.
For example, the report time of alarm, signal track, and performance statistics will use the
new system time. If the time is modified too much, the accuracy of the signal track and
performance statistics may be affected.
Syntax
SET TIME:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,TIME=<TIME>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET TIME command, refer to Table 3-7.
Table 3-7 SET TIME Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
NE
TIME
Sub-network ID in operation
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99999
Time
Time
None
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
4
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET TIME command, refer to Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 SET TIME Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Failure reason. If the operation fails, this command
Charac-
shows failure details, otherwise, it shows ---.
ter
3-5
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-9 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to set the time on an NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0
to 2013-03-06 12:58:46. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result is
Successful.
SET TIME:SUBNET=0,NE=0,TIME="2013-03-06 12:58:46",RADIO=ALL;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.4 SWAP BOARD

Function
This command applies for the CC boards and PM boards. If this command is executed,
the CC boards or PM boards swap the master/slave state.
l
The PM board may operate in master/slave mode or load-sharing mode. This

command applies only to the PM boards in master/slave mode. This command is
applies to the master PM board only. If the slave board is selected, the system shows
that the board does not support this command. If both PM boards are selected, board
swap is performed twice, which means no swap (compared to the original state).
The CC boards support master/slave mode and load-sharing mode. This command
applies to the CC boards in master/slave mode. A board swap can be performed only
after five minutes from the last swap, and the new master CC board time and Ethernet
access must be normal. If the CC boards operate in load-sharing mode, the system
disables the swap function.
3-6
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command applies when you want to replace a CC board in service. For example,
when you want to replace or extract by force the master CC board, execute this command,
the original slave CC board switches to master and takes the services (only the master CC
board takes services), and the original master board switches to slave.
Syntax
SWAP BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,S
LOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SWAP BOARD command, refer to Table
3-10.
Table 3-10 SWAP BOARD Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
RADIO
Operated sub-network ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
1~255
None
Required
Required
Operated NE ID
Slot number of the
Inte-
operated board
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SWAP BOARD command, refer to Table
3-11.
Table 3-11 SWAP BOARD Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Failure reason. If the operation fails, this field
Charac-
ter
3-7
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-12 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to swap the CC board (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =1). In this example, board swap
fails, and the detailed information shows that the slave board does not support swap.
SWAP BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1;
1 Fail The slave board does not support swap.
Rows: 1
3.1.5 SHOW BOARD

Function
This command queries the status of all the boards in an NE.
This command applies when you want to query the status and manual operation of a board,
for example, failed/operational, master/slave, available/not available, block/unblock, and
power-on/power-off.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the queried board status.
3-8
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
SHOW BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,S
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW BOARD command, refer to Table
3-13.
Table 3-13 SHOW BOARD Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
ter
1
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Radio
Enum
Required
NET
2
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
RADIO
Operated NE ID
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW BOARD command, refer to Table
3-14.
Table 3-14 SHOW BOARD Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

3
ADMIN
Administrative status
Character
MASTER
Master or slave
Character
SERVICE
Service status
Character
INIT
Initialization status
Character
SAVE
Save power status
Character
3-9
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
ALARM
Alarm status
Character
PER-
Performance status
Character
FORM
10
BLOCK
Manual block status
Character
11
POWER
Manual power status
Character
Table 3-15 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the board status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =1). The query result is shown as
follows:
SHOW BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Fail Reason | Administrative Status | Master or Slave | Service
Status | Initialization Status | Save Power Status | Alarm Status | Performance Status |
Block Status | Manual Power Status
1 Successful Failed Master Available Normal Normal Normal Normal Unblock

Powered-on
Rows: 1
3-10
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.6 SHOW PPP

Function
This command queries the PPP link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports alarms about PPP link break.
After the command is successfully executed, the result shows that the PPP link status is
normal or failed.
Syntax
SHOW PPP:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,PPPLINK=<PPPLINK>,RADIO=<RADIO
>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW PPP command, refer to Table 3-16.
Table 3-16 SHOW PPP Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Operated
NET
sub-network ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
999
3
PP-
PPP link ID
Integer
0~15
None
Required
Radio
Enum
Required
PLINK
4
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW PPP command, refer to Table
3-17.
Table 3-17 SHOW PPP Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

3
ADMIN
3-11
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-18 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the PPP link status (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and PPP link ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW PPP:SUBNET=0,NE=0,PPPLINK=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Information | Administrative Status
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.7 SHOW TCP

Function
This command queries the TCP link status.
This command applies when a base station reports alarms about TCP link break.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the TCP link status (normal
or failed).
This alarm has no impact on the system.
Syntax
SHOW TCP:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,TCP=<TCP>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-12
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW TCP command, refer to Table 3-19.
Table 3-19 SHOW TCP Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
eter
1
SUB-
Operated sub-network
Inte-
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
TCP object ID, TCP
Inte-
0~1
None
Required
link ID
ger
Radio
Enum
Required
TCP
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW TCP command, refer to Table
3-20.
Table 3-20 SHOW TCP Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

3
ADMIN
Examples
The following example shows how to query the TCP link status (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and TCP link ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW TCP:SUBNET=0,NE=0,TCP=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3-13
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.8 SHOW IMA

Function
This command queries the IMA link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports IMA faults.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the IMA link status (normal
or failed).
Syntax
SHOW IMA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,ATMLAYERLINK=<ATMLAYERLINK
>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW IMA command, refer to Table 3-21.
Table 3-21 SHOW IMA Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
NE
ATMLAY-
Description
Type
RADIO
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Inte-
0~11
None
Required
Required
ATM link ID
ERLINK
4
Range
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW IMA command, refer to Table
3-22.
Table 3-22 SHOW IMA Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
ADMIN
Charac-
ter
Charac-
ter
3-14
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-23 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the IMA link status (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and ATM link ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW IMA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,ATMLAYERLINK=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.9 SHOW BFD

Function
This command queries the BFD link status.
This command applies when a base station reports alarms about BFD link break.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the BFD link status (normal
or failed).
Syntax
SHOW BFD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,BFD=<BFD>;
3-15
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW BFD command, refer to Table 3-24.
Table 3-24 SHOW BFD Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Operated sub-
NET
network ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
999
3
BFD
Object ID for BFD
Integer
1~10
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW BFD command, refer to Table
3-25.
Table 3-25 SHOW BFD Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

3
ADMIN
Examples
The following example shows how to query the route status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, and object ID for BFD detection = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW BFD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,BFD=1;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Administrative Status
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.10 SHOW HDLC

Function
This command queries the HDLC channel status.
3-16
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command applies when the OMM reports alarms about HDLC channel break.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the HDLC channel status
(normal or failed).
Syntax
SHOW HDLC:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,HDLC=<HDLC>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW HDLC command, refer to Table
3-26.
Table 3-26 SHOW HDLC Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Object ID for HDLC
Inte-
0~15
None
Required
channel
ger
Radio
Enum
Required
HDLC
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW HDLC command, refer to Table
3-27.
Table 3-27 SHOW HDLC Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

3
ADMIN
Table 3-28 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
3-17
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the HDLC channel status (sub-network ID = 0,
NE ID = 0, and HDCL channel ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW HDLC:SUBNET=0,NE=0,HDLC=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.11 SHOW FIBER

Function
This command queries the optical port status of a base station.
This command applies when the OMM reports optical port faults.
After the command is successfully executed, the system returns the administrative status
and master/slave status of RRU optical ports if the RRU board is queried. The system
returns the administrative status, master/slave status, alarm status, and performance
status of the optical ports on the interface board if the FS board or BPL board is queried.
Syntax
SHOW FIBER:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,FIBERDEVICE=<FIBERDEVICE>,RA
DIO=<RADIO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
3-18
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW FIBER command, refer to Table
3-29.
Table 3-29 SHOW FIBER Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
NE
FIBERD-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Inte-
1~16
None
Required
Fiber device ID
EVICE
ger
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
RACK
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
SHELF
SLOT
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW FIBER command, refer to Table
3-30.
Table 3-30 SHOW FIBER Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

3
ADMIN
Character
MAS-
Master or slave
Character
TER
5
ALARM
Alarm status
Character
PER-
Performance status
Character
FORM
3-19
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to query the optical port status (subnet ID = 0, NE ID =
0, and fiber device ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW FIBER:SUBNET=0,NE=0,FIBERDEVICE=1,RADIO=ALL,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SL
OT=8; ;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Administrative Status | Master or Slave | Alarm
Status | Performance Status
1 Successful Normal Master Normal Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.12 SHOW AAL5

Function
This command queries AAL5 link status (ALL5 links are maintained by SSCOP, and
SSCOP alarms can show AAL5 link status).
This command applies when the OMM reports alarms about SSCOP link break.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the AAL5 link status
(normal or failed).
Syntax
SHOW AAL5:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,SAALUNI=<SAALUNI>,RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW AAL5 command, refer to Table
3-31.
Table 3-31 SHOW AAL5 Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
NE
Inte-
0~99999
ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
3-20
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
1~18
None
Required
Required
ter
3
SAAL-
SaalUni object ID
Inte-
UNI
4
RADIO
ger
Radio
Enum
Table 3-32 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW AAL5 command, refer to Table
3-33.
Table 3-33 SHOW ALL5 Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
ADMIN
Charac-
ter
Charac-
ter
Examples
The following example shows how to query the AAL5 link status (sub-network ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, and SaalUni object ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW AAL5:SUBNET=0,NE=0,SAALUNI=0,RADIO=ALL;
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No. | Operation Result | Failure Information | Administrative Status

1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.13 SHOW PHY LAYER

Function
This command queries the Ethernet physical link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports alarms about Ethernet physical link break.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the Ethernet physical link
status (normal or failed).
Syntax
SHOW PHY LAYER:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,PHYLAYERPORT=<PHYLAYER
PORT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW PHY LAYER command, refer to
Table 3-34.
Table 3-34 SHOW PHY LAYER Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
o.
1
SUBNET
NE
Operated sub-
Inte-
network ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
0~17
None
Required
Required
PHYLAY-
Physical port object
Inte-
ERPORT
ID
ger
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW PHY LAYER command, refer to
Table 3-35.
3-22
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-35 SHOW PHY LAYER Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
ADMIN
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
Charac-
ter
Table 3-36 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the device status (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and physical port ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW PHY LAYER:SUBNET=0,NE=0,PHYLAYERPORT=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information | Administrative Status
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3-23
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.14 SHOW ETHERNET FAULT

Function
This command queries the Ethernet port status.
This command applies when a base station reports E1/T1 link faults.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the Ethernet port status
(normal or failed).
Syntax
SHOW ETHERNET FAULT:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,ETHERNETOAM=<ETHE
RNETOAM>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW ETHERNET FAULT command,
Table 3-37 SHOW ETHERNET FAULT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
NE
Description
Type
Operated NE ID
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
1
None
Required
Required
ETH-
Object ID for Ethernet fault
Inte-
ERNE-
detection, configuration ID
ger
TOAM
for Ethernet fault detection
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW ETHERNET FAULT command,
Table 3-38 SHOW ETHERNET FAULT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

3-24
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
3
ADMIN
Instance
Count
Character
Table 3-39 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query Ethernet port status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, and configuration ID for Ethernet fault detection = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW ETHERNET FAULT:SUBNET=0,NE=0,ETHERNETOAM=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.15 SHOW ROUTE

Function
This command queries the route status.
This command applies when a base station reports route alarms.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the route status (normal
or failed).
3-25
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
SHOW ROUTE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,ROUTEDETECT=<ROUTEDETECT
>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW Route command, refer to Table
3-40.
Table 3-40 SHOW Route Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
Integer
ID
2
NE
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
9999
ROUT-
Object ID for route
EDE-
detection
Integer
1~100
None
Required
Enum
Required
TECT
4
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW Route command, refer to Table
3-41.
Table 3-41 SHOW Route Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

3
ADMIN
Table 3-42 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
3-26
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the route status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, and object ID for route detection = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW ROUTE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,ROUTEDETECT=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Success Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.16 SHOW SCTP

Function
This command queries the SCTP link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports SCTP link alarms.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the SCTP link status
(normal or failed).
Syntax
SHOW SCTP:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,SCTP=<SCTP>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW SCTP command, refer to Table
3-43.
3-27
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-43 SHOW SCTP Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
SCTP object ID, SCTP
Inte-
1~64
None
Required
link ID
ger
Radio
Enum
Required
SCTP
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW SCTP command, refer to Table
3-44.
Table 3-44 SHOW SCTP Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

3
ADMIN
Character
BLOCK
Manual block status
Character
Examples
The following example shows how to query the SCTP link status (sub-network ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, and SCTP link ID = 1). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW SCTP:SUBNET=0,NE=0,SCTP=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information | Administrative Status | Manual Block
1 Successful Normal Blocked
Rows: 1
3-28
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.17 SHUTDOWN SCTP

Function
This command smoothly disconnects the SCTP link. During this command execution, the
system does not process new services, but sends existing services to the remote end.
After the existing service data is transmitted, the system disconnects the association.
This command applies when you want to disconnect the SCTP association and
reestablishes the S1 AP of LTE services.
After this command is successfully executed, the SCTP association is smoothly
disconnected.
Impact on the system: The SCTP association is smoothly disconnected and reestablished,
and the service is reestablished.
Syntax
SHUTDOWN SCTP:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,SCTP=<SCTP>,SCTPNO=<SCTPN
O>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHUTDOWN SCTP command, refer to
Table 3-45.
Table 3-45 SHUTDOWN SCTP Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
SCTP
SCTP object ID, SCTP
Integer
1~64
None
Required
SCTPNO port number
Integer
0~63
None
Required
Radio
Enum
Required
link ID
4
SCTPNO
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHUTDOWN SCTP command, refer to
Table 3-46.
3-29
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-46 SHUTDOWN SCTP Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Examples
The following example shows how to disconnect the SCTP link (sub-network ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, and SCTP link ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHUTDOWN SCTP:SUBNET=0,NE=0,SCTP=1,SCTPNO=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.18 SHOW FAN

Function
This command queries the fan (SA and FCE) status.
This command applies when you find a fan fault, FCE fan fault, or an over-temperature
alarm is reported in the OMMB alarm monitoring window.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the fan status (normal or
failed).
Syntax
SHOW FAN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
T=<SLOT>,FANDEVICE=<FANDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW FAN command, refer to Table 3-47.
3-30
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-47 SHOW FAN Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
FANDE-
RADIO
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
0~9999
ger
99
Inte-
0~9999
ger
99999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Fan device ID
Inte-
1~20
None
Required
Required
Operated NE ID
VICE
7
Optional
Inte-
NET
2
Default
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW FAN command, refer to Table
3-48.
Table 3-48 SHOW FAN Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

3
ADMIN
Table 3-49 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
3-31
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the fan status of the SA board (sub-network
ID = 0, NE ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13). The result is
shown as follows:
SHOW FAN:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13,FANDEVICE=1,RADIO=A
LL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.19 START FAN DUST

Function
This command enables the fan-dust-clean function. At the configured time, the system
starts to clean dust on the fans until the configured timer expires.
Note: This function applies only for the FCE board in the ZXSDR 8900B RC7/9.
This command applies when there is much dust on the fans.
After this command is successfully executed, the fan-dust-clean function is enabled.
Syntax
START FAN DUST:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,FANDEVICE=<FANDEVICE>,DUSTTIME=<DUSTTIME>,STARTH
OUR=<STARTHOUR>,STARTMIN=<STARTMIN>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the START FAN DUST command, refer to
Table 3-50.
3-32
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-50 START FAN DUST Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
Default
Op-
Instance
Value
tional or
Count
Not
1
SUBNET
Integer
ID
2
NE
0~99999
None
Re-
Operated NE ID
Integer
quired
0~99999
None
Re-
9999
3
RACK
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
SHELF
None
Re-
SLOT
Shelf number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
FANDE-
Slot number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
10
quired
Fan device ID
Integer
1~20
None
Re-
VICE
7
quired
board
6
quired
board
5
quired
board
4
quired
DUST-
Dust-clean duration
Integer
TIME
(minute)
STARTH-
Dust-clean start time
OUR
(hour)
START-
Dust-clean start time
MIN
(minute)
RADIO
Radio
None
None
Re-
quired
Integer
None
None
Re-
quired
Integer
None
None
Re-
quired
Enum
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the START FAN DUST command, refer to
Table 3-51.
Table 3-51 START FAN DUST Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
3-33
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-52 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to enable the fan-dust-clean function (sub-network ID
= 0, NE ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13). The result is
shown as follows:
START FAN DUST:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13,FANDEVICE=1,DUS
TTIME=10,STARTHOUR=3,STARTMIN=10,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.20 STOP FAN DUST

Function
This command disables the fan-dust-clean function. If the fan-dust-clean function was
enabled and this command is executed, the fan does not rotate in reverse at full speed at
the originally configured time.
This command applies if the environment is clean and the fan is not required to be cleaned.
After this command is successfully executed, the fan-dust-clean function is disabled.
Impact on the system: If too much dust is accumulated on the fans, heat dissipation may
be affected. In severe cases, it causes over-temperature alarms.
3-34
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
STOP FAN DUST:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,FANDEVICE=<FANDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the STOP FAN DUST command, refer to Table
3-53.
Table 3-53 STOP FAN DUST Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Fan device ID
Inte-
1~20
None
Required
Required
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
FANDEVICE
Default
RADIO
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the STOP FAN DUST command, refer to
Table 3-54.
Table 3-54 STOP FAN DUST Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
3-35
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-55 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to disable the fan-dust-clean function of the SA board
(sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13).
The result is shown as follows:
STOP FAN DUST:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13,FANDEVICE=1,RADI
O=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.21 MANUAL CONTROL FAN

Function
This command controls the fan speed at four levels: level 1, level 2, level 3, and level 4.
The higher the level is, the higher the fan speed is.
This command can adjust the fan speed to a specific level for 10 minutes only. After that,
the fan speed is automatically controlled.
This command applies when the shelf temperature is too high and manual fan control is
required to lower the temperature.
After this command is successfully executed, the fan rotates at the designated speed for
10 minutes and then comes back to automatic control mode.
3-36
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
MANUAL CONTROL FAN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF
=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,FANDEVICE=<FANDEVICE>,SPEEDLEVEL=<SPEEDLE
VEL>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the MANUAL CONTROL FAN command, refer
to Table 3-56.
Table 3-56 MANUAL CONTROL FAN Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
NE
RACK
Description
Type
Operated NE ID
Rack number of the board
Range
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Inte-
1~255
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
quired
None
SHELF
Shelf number of the board
Inte-
None
SLOT
Slot number of the board
Inte-
1~255
None
FANDE-
Fan device ID
Inte-
VICE
7
SPEEDLE-
1~255
None
VEL
Re-
Re-
quired
1~20
None
ger
Speed level
quired
ger
6
Required
ger
5
quired
ger
4
Re-
Re-
quired
Inte-
Level 1
ger
to level 4
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the MANUAL CONTROL FAN command,
Table 3-57 MANUAL CONTROL FAN Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
3-37
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to manually control the fan speed (sub-network ID = 0,
NE ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13). The result is shown
as follows:
MANUAL CONTROL FAN:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13,FANDEVIC
E=1,SPEEDLEVEL=2;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.22 AUTO CONTROL FAN

Function
Auto-Control Fan
Command
AUTO CONTROL FAN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
LF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,FANDEVICE=<FANDEVICE>;,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-58 shows the input parameters of AUTO CONTROL FAN.
Table 3-58 AUTO CONTROL FAN Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
FANDE-
Fan
INT
0~429496
Required
VICE
Device
Required
7295
Object ID
7
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
3-38
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
Table 3-59 shows the output parameters of AUTO CONTROL FAN.
Table 3-59 AUTO CONTROL FAN Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
Table 3-60 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to automatically control the fan speed, whose subnet
ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is
1, and fan device ID is 1. The command is executed successfully, and the returned result
is Successful.
AUTO CONTROL FAN:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,FANDEVICE
=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-39
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.23 RESET AISG

Function
The command resets the AISG antenna auxiliary devices on the base station, including
TMA, RET, and wave trap. This command applies when you want to clear faults such as
severe TMA alarms, and unknown software errors.
After this command is successfully executed, the software is reset and the device is
powered on again.
Syntax
RESET AISG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET AISG command, refer to Table
3-61.
Table 3-61 RESET AISG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
Required
NET
2
Default
Operated NE ID
ger
GDEVICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET AISG command, refer to Table
3-62.
3-40
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-62 RESET AISG Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Table 3-63 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to reset the AISG device (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and AISG device
ID =1). The result is shown as follows:
RESET AISG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RADIO
=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-41
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.24 SELFTEST AISG

Function
The command checks the control software running in the AISG antenna auxiliary devices,
including TMA, RET, and wave trap.
This command applies if the device does not respond to the operation.
If this command is successfully executed, the software runs normally. If this command
fails, the self-test fails due to some reasons (for details, refer to failure causes).
Syntax
SELFTEST AISG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SELFTEST AISG command, refer to Table
3-64.
Table 3-64 SELFTEST AISG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the operated
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
Required
NET
2
Default
Operated NE ID
GDE-
ger
VICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SELFTEST AISG command, refer to
Table 3-65.
3-42
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-65 SELFTEST AISG Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-66 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to self-test the AISG device (sub-network ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and AISG
device ID =1). The result is shown as follows:
SELFTEST AISG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RAD
IO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-43
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.25 SHOW AISG ALARM

Function
This command queries the alarms stored in the AISG antenna devices (including TMA,
RET, wave trap), and reports them to the OMM.
This command applies when you want to query the alarms stored in the devices through
the OMM, or check the administrative status of the devices.
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the number of alarms and
alarm information stored in the devices.
Syntax
SHOW AISG ALARM:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
LF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW AISG ALARM command, refer to
Table 3-67.
Table 3-67 SHOW AISG ALARM Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AISGDE-
RADIO
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
Required
VICE
7
Default
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW AISG ALARM command, refer to
Table 3-68.
3-44
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-68 SHOW AISG ALARM Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
eter
1
RESULT
DETAIL
NUM-
ter
Charac-
ter
Number of alarms
Integer
Alarm status
Charac-
BER
4
STATUS
ter
Table 3-69 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the alarm status of the AISG device
(sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot
number = 1, and AISG device ID =1). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW AISG ALARM:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Alarm Number | Alarm Status
1 Successful 5 Normal
Rows: 1
3-45
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.26 CLEAN AISG ALARM

Function
This command clears the alarms stored in the AISG antenna auxiliary devices (including
TMA, RET, and wave trap) and reported to the OMM, but link-break alarms are not cleared.
This command applies when the OMM requires to isolate the related device alarms, for
example, fails to set gain, electrical machine faults, and minor TMA alarms.
If this command is successfully executed, the alarms stored in the devices and reported
to the OMM are successfully cleared (excluding link-break alarms).If this command fails,
the alarms fail to be cleared due to some reasons (for details, refer to failure causes).
Syntax
CLEAN AISG ALARM:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SH
ELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CLEAN AISG ALARM command, refer to
Table 3-70.
Table 3-70 CLEAN AISG ALARM Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
Required
NET
2
Default
Operated NE ID
ger
GDEVICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
3-46
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CLEAN AISG ALARM command, refer
to Table 3-71.
Table 3-71 CLEAN AISG ALARM Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
eter
1
RESULT
DETAIL
ter
Charac-
ter
Table 3-72 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to clear the alarms of the AISG device (sub-network ID
= 0, NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and
AISG device ID =1). The result is shown as follows:
CLEAN AISG ALARM:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-47
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.27 SET AISG MODE

Function
This command sets the operating mode of TMA to Normal or Bypass. In Bypass mode,
the TMA does not work.
The TMA is set to bypass mode by using this command if the TMA is not required.
If this command is successfully executed, the TMA mode is modified. If this command fails,
the TMA mode modification fails due to some reasons (for details, refer to failure causes).
Impact on the system: The TMA does not work in bypass mode, and the RSSI value in
the related cell is affected.
Syntax
SET AISG MODE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,MODE=<MODE>,RADIO=<RADIO
>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET AISG MODE command, refer to Table
3-73.
Table 3-73 SET AISG MODE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
0~1
None
Required
Required
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
ger
GDEVICE
7
MODE
TMA operating mode
Integer
RADIO
Radio
Enum
3-48
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET AISG MODE command, refer to
Table 3-74.
Table 3-74 SET AISG MODE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-75 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to set the TMA mode of the AISG device (sub-network
ID = 0, NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1,
and AISG device ID =1). The result is shown as follows:
SET AISG MODE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,MO
DE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-49
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.28 SEND AISG DATA

Function
This command updates the configuration data stored in the RET with the files provided by
the vendor, and applies the new configuration data. This command applies when you want
to upgrade the RET configuration data.
If this command is successfully executed, the RET configuration data is successfully
updated. If this command fails, the configuration data update fails due to some reasons
(for details, refer to failure causes).
Syntax
SEND AISG DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHEL
F>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,FILENAME=<FILENAME>,RADI
O=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SEND AISG DATA command, refer to Table
3-76.
Table 3-76 SEND AISG DATA Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Description
Type
Integer
Range
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RACK
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
AIS-
AISG device ID
Integer
1~12
None
Required
Configuration file name
Char-
0~99999
None
Required
acter
Enum
Required
GDEVICE
7
FILENAME
RADIO
Radio
3-50
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SEND AISG DATA command, refer to
Table 3-77.
Table 3-77 SEND AISG DATA Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
Table 3-78 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to send the configuration data of the AISG device
SEND AISG DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,FI
LENAME="0",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-51
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.29 CALIBRATE AISG RET

Function
This command calibrates the RET devices on the base station. Only after the RET is
calibrated, you can set RET tilt.
After the RET is initially installed, this command applies for calibration.
If this command is successfully executed, the RET is successfully calibrated and can be
used. If this command fails, the calibration fails due to some reasons (for details, refer to
failure causes).
Impact on the system: The antenna rotates and the related cell coverage changes.
Syntax
CALIBRATE AISG RET:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<S
HELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CALIBRATE AISG RET command, refer
to Table 3-79.
Table 3-79 CALIBRATE AISG RET Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
Slot number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
1~12
None
Required
Required
NET
2
Default
Operated NE ID
ger
GDEVICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CALIBRATE AISG RET command, refer
to Table 3-80.
3-52
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-80 CALIBRATE AISG RET Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-81 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to calibrate the RET of the AISG device (sub-network
CALIBRATE AISG RET:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-53
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.30 SET RET TILT

Function
This command sets antenna tilt by controlling the RET to adjust the related cell coverage.
This command applies when you want to adjust the related cell coverage.
If this command is successfully executed, the RET tilt is set to the current value. If this
command fails, the RET tilt setting fails due to some reasons (for details, refer to failure
causes).
Impact on the system: The related cell coverage changes.
Syntax
SET RET TILT:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,TILT=<TILT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET RET TILT command, refer to Table
3-82.
Table 3-82 SET RET TILT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NE
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
AIS-
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
operated board
ger
1~255
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~12
None
Required
-30.0~30
None
Required
Required
NET
2
Default
Operated NE ID
Shelf number of the
Inte-
operated board
ger
Inte-
board
ger
AISG device ID
Inte-
GDE-
ger
VICE
7
TILT
Tilt (degree)
Float
.0
8
RADIO
Radio
Enum
3-54
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET RET TILT command, refer to Table
3-83.
Table 3-83 SET RET TILT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-84 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to set the tilt of the device (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID =
0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and AISG device
ID =1) to 10.0. The result is shown as follows:
SET RET TILT:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,TILT
=10.00,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-55
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.31 SHOW RET TILT

Function
This command queries the antenna tilt and checks the cell coverage. The antenna tilt
angle is the sum of the mechanical tilt angle and RET tilt angle.
This command applies when you want to check the antenna tilt or calculate the cell
coverage.
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the current RET tilt.
Syntax
SHOW RET TILT:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW RET TILT command, refer to Table
3-85.
Table 3-85 SHOW RET TILT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Descrip-
Type
Range
tion
1
SUBNET
Operated
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
subnetwork ID
2
NE
Operated
NE ID
RACK
Rack
999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~12
None
Required
Enum
Required
number of
the board
4
SHELF
Shelf
number of
the board
SLOT
Slot
number of
the board
AISGDE-
AISG
VICE
device ID
RADIO
Radio
3-56
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW RET TILT command, refer to Table
3-86.
Table 3-86 SHOW RET TILT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Char-
acter
2
DETAIL
TILT
Char-
acter
Tilt (degree)
Char-
acter
Table 3-87 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the RET tilt of the AISG device (sub-network
SHOW RET TILT:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RA
DIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Tilt (degree)
1 Successful 30.0
3-57
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Rows: 1
3.1.32 SHOW MODE

Function
This command queries the current TMA operating mode and checks the effect on
receiving signal power. In bypass mode, the TMA does not work. If the TMA device fails,
it automatically turns to bypass mode.
This command applies when you want to check whether the TMA mode is set to bypass,
or the RSSI value of an RRU is abnormal.
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the current TMA operating
mode.
Syntax
SHOW MODE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW MODE command, refer to Table
3-88.
Table 3-88 SHOW MODE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
Description
Type
NET
2
NE
RACK
Operated NE ID
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
ger
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~12
None
Required
Required
ger
4
SHELF
Integer
SLOT
Integer
AIS-
AISG device ID
Integer
GDEVICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
3-58
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW MODE command, refer to Table
3-89.
Table 3-89 SHOW MODE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
eter
1
RESULT
DETAIL
MODE
ter
Charac-
ter
Mode
Charac-
ter
Table 3-90 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the operating mode of the AISG device
SHOW MODE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RADIO
=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Mode
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3-59
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.33 SET BAT TMA11 DATA

Function
This command sets data stored in the TMA device of V1.1 protocol in batches, which
is used to record the installation date, installer ID, NE ID, sector ID, antenna direction,
mechanical tilt, ATMA mode, ATMA serial number, and ATMA type.
To record initial installation information of a device during commissioning or device
replacement, use this command.
The data stored in the TMA device of V1.1 protocol is set in batches after the command is
executed successfully. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure causes are
displayed.
The operation has no effect on the system.
Syntax
SET BAT TMA11 DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<S
HELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>[,INSTALLATION_DATE=<IN
STALLATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATIO
N_ID=<BASE_STATION_ID>][,SECTOR_ID=<SECTOR_ID>][,BEARING=<BEARING
>][,MECHANICAL_TILT=<MECHANICAL_TILT>][,MODEL_NUMBER=<MODEL_N
UMBER>][,SERIAL_NUMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,TMA_TYPE=<TMA_TYPE>],R
ADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET BAT TMA11 DATA command, refer
to Table 3-91.
Table 3-91 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT TMA11 DATA Command
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Integer
configurations
2
NE
RACK
0~9999
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
99
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
Range
quired
0~9999
None
99999
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
SHELF
None
SLOT
Re-
quired
Shelf number of the
Integer
1~255
None
board
5
quired
board
4
Re-
Re-
quired
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
3-60
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parameter
AISGDE-
Description
Type
AISG device ID
Integer
Range
1~12
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
VICE
7
INSTALLA-
quired
Installations date
TION_DA-
Char-
YY-M-
acter
M-DD
None
Optional
Char-
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
0~9999
None
Optional
Re-
TE
8
INSTALLA-
Installer ID
TION_ID
9
BASE_ST-
acter
NE ID
Char-
ATION_ID
10
SEC-
acter
Sector ID
Char-
TOR_ID
11
BEARING
acter
Antenna direction
Character
12
MECHANI-
Mechanical tilt (degree)
CAL_TILT
13
MODEL_
acter
Mode
Char-
NUMBER
14
SERIAL_
acter
Serial number
Char-
NUMBER
15
TMA_T-
acter
TMA type
Char-
YPE
16
RADIO
Char-
acter
Radio
Enum
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET BAT TMA11 DATA command, refer
to Table 3-92.
Table 3-92 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT TMA11 DATA Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Char-
ter
1
RESULT
acter
2
DETAIL
Displays detailed information of the operation. If the
Char-
operation fails, this command shows failure details.
acter
If the operation succeeds, this command displays

---.
3-61
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Sets AISG device data.
Char-
ter
3
DATA
acter
Table 3-93 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to set data of the device, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU
rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is 1, and AISG device ID is
1. The command is executed successfully, and queried information is returned, in which
the operation result is Successful.
SET BAT TMA11 DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,INSTALLATION_DATE="2013-05-06",INSTALLATION_ID="666",BASE_STATION
_ID="13",SECTOR_ID="43",BEARING="45",MECHANICAL_TILT="45",MODEL_N
UMBER="12",SERIAL_NUMBER="1346889643",TMA_TYPE="0",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-62
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.34 SET BAT RET11 DATA

Function
This command sets data stored in the RETC device of V1.1 protocol in batches, which
mechanical tilt, serial number, frequency band, beamwidth, and gain.
The data stored in the RETC device of V1.1 protocol is set in batches after the command
is executed successfully. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure causes
are displayed.
Syntax
SET BAT RET DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SH
ELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>[,INSTALLATION_DATE=<INS
TALLATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATIO
UMBER>][,SERIAL_NUMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,FREQUENCY_BAND=<FREQ
UENCY_BAND>][,BEAMWIDTH=<BEAMWIDTH>][,GAIN=<GAIN>],RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET BAT RET DATA command, refer to
Table 3-94.
Table 3-94 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT RET DATA Command
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Integer
configurations
2
NE
RACK
0~999
De-
Op-
In-
fault
tional
stance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Re-
999
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
Range
0~999
quired
None
999999
Integer
1~255
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
4
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
5
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
3-63
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parameter
AISGDEVICE
Description
Type
AISG device ID
Integer
Range
1~12
De-
Op-
In-
fault
tional
stance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Re-
quired
7
INSTALLA-
Installations date
TION_DATE
8
INSTALLA-
Installer ID
TION_ID
9
BASE_STA-
NE ID
TION_ID
10
11
12
SECTOR_ID
BEARING
MECHANI-
Sector ID
Antenna direction
CAL_TILT
13
MODEL_NU-
Mode
MBER
14
SE-
Serial number
RIAL_NUM-
Char-
YY-M-
acter
M-DD
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Char-
0~999
acter
Enum
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
BER
15
FREQUENCY-
Frequency band
_BAND
16
17
18
BEAMWIDTH
GAIN
Beamwidth (degree)
Gain
RADIO
Radio
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
None
Op-
tional
-
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET BAT RET DATA command, refer to
Table 3-95.
Table 3-95 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT RET DATA Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
SULT
Charac-
ter
3-64
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
2
DETAIL
Instance
Count
Charac-
operation fails, this command shows failure details. If
ter
the operation succeeds, this command displays ---.

3
DATA
Charac-
ter
Table 3-96 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
1. The command is executed, and queried information is returned, in which the operation
result is Failed.
SET BAT TMA11 SET BAT RET DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT
=1,AISGDEVICE=1,INSTALLATION_DATE="2013-05-06",INSTALLATION_ID="32
",BASE_STATION_ID="1",SECTOR_ID="2312121",BEARING="23",MECHANICAL_
TILT="32",MODEL_NUMBER="123445",SERIAL_NUMBER="0232211",FREQUENC
Y_BAND="32",BEAMWIDTH=24",GAIN="22",RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | AISG Device Data
1 Failed Time-out
Rows: 1
3-65
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.35 SET BAT ACOM DATA

Function
This command sets data stored in the ACOM device of V1.1 protocol in batches, which
mechanical tilt, ACOM mode, ACOM serial number, and ACOM type.
The data stored in the ACOM device of V1.1 protocol is set in batches after the command
is executed successfully. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure causes
are displayed.
Syntax
SET BAT ACOM DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<S
STALLATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATI
ON_ID=<BASE_STATION_ID>][,SECTOR_ID=<SECTOR_ID>][,BEARING=<BEARIN
G>][,MECHANICAL_TILT=<MECHANICAL_TILT>][,MODEL_NUMBER=<MODEL_
NUMBER>][,SERIAL_NUMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,ACOM_TYPE=<ACOM_TYP
E>],RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET BAT ACOM DATA command, refer to
Table 3-97.
Table 3-97 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT ACOM DATA Command
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Integer
configurations
2
NE
RACK
0~9999
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
99
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
Range
0~9999
quired
None
99999
Integer
1~255
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
4
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
5
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
3-66
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parameter
Description
AISGDEVICE
Type
AISG device ID
Integer
Range
1~12
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
7
INSTALLA-
Installations date
TION_DATE
8
INSTALLA-
Installer ID
TION_ID
9
YY/M-
acter
M//DD
Char-
0~9999
None
BASE_STA-
NE ID
Char-
None
Sector ID
Char-
0~9999
None
BEARING
Antenna direction
Char-
0~9999
None
MECHANI-
CAL_TILT
13
0~9999
None
MODEL_NU-
Mode
Char-
0~9999
None
Serial number
Char-
RIAL_NUM-
Op-
Op-
Op-
tional
0~9999
None
acter
SE-
Op-
tional
acter
MBER
14
Char-
tional
acter
12
Op-
tional
acter
11
tional
acter
SECTOR_ID
Optional
acter
TION_ID
10
Char-
Op-
tional
0~9999
None
acter
Op-
tional
BER
15
ACOM_TYPE
TMA type
Char-
0~9999
None
acter
16
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Op-
tional
-
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET BAT ACOM DATA command, refer
to Table 3-98.
Table 3-98 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT ACOM DATA Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
operation fails, this command shows failure details. If the
ter
operation succeeds, this command displays ---.
3-67
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
3
DATA
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
Table 3-99 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
SET BAT RET SET BAT ACOM DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=0,SHELF=0,SLOT=0,A
ISGDEVICE=0,INSTALLATION_DATE="0",INSTALLATION_ID="0",BASE_STATIO
N_ID="0",SECTOR_ID="0",BEARING="0",MECHANICAL_TILT="0",MODEL_NUM
BER="0",SERIAL_NUMBER="0",ACOM_TYPE="0",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-68
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.36 SET BAT TMA20 DATA

Function
This command sets data stored in the TMA device of V1.1 protocol in batches, which
mechanical tilt, ATMA mode, ATMA serial number, and ATMA type.
The data stored in the TMA device of V1.1 protocol is set in batches after the command is
executed successfully. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the failure causes are
displayed.
Syntax
SET BAT TMA20 DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<S
STALLATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATIO
UMBER>][,SERIAL_NUMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,FREQUENCY_BAND=<FREQ
UENCY_BAND>][,BEAMWIDTH=<BEAMWIDTH>][,GAIN=<GAIN>],RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET BAT TMA20 DATA command, refer
to Table 3-100.
Table 3-100 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT TMA20 DATA Command
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Integer
configurations
2
NE
RACK
0~9999
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
99
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
Range
quired
0~9999
None
99999
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
SHELF
None
SLOT
Re-
quired
Shelf number of the
Integer
1~255
None
board
5
quired
board
4
Re-
Re-
quired
Slot number of the

board
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
3-69
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parameter
Description
AISGDEVICE
Type
AISG device ID
Integer
Range
1~12
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
7
INSTALLA-
Installations date
TION_DATE
8
INSTALLA-
Installer ID
TION_ID
9
YY/MM-
ter
/DD
Charac-
0~9999
None
BASE_STA-
NE ID
Charac-
None
Sector ID
Charac-
0~9999
None
BEARING
Antenna direction
Charac-
0~9999
None
13
MECHANI-
Mechanical tilt
Charac-
CAL_TILT
(degree)
ter
MODEL_NU-
Mode
Charac-
MBER
14
0~9999
None
Serial number
Charac-
RIAL_NUM-
Op-
Op-
Op-
tional
0~9999
- None
Op-
tional
0~9999
None
ter
SE-
tional
ter
12
Op-
tional
ter
11
tional
ter
SECTOR_ID
Optional
ter
TION_ID
10
Charac-
Op-
tional
0~9999
None
ter
Op-
tional
BER
15
FREQUENC-
Frequency band
Charac-
Y_BAND
16
0~9999
None
ter
BEAMWIDTH
Beamwidth (degree)
Charac-
GAIN
Gain
Charac-
0~9999
None
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Op-
tional
0~9999
None
ter
18
tional
ter
17
Op-
Op-
tional
-
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET BAT TMA20 DATA command, refer
to Table 3-101.
Table 3-101 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET BAT TMA20 DATA Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
SULT
Charac-
ter
3-70
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
2
DETAIL
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter

3
DATA
Charac-
ter
Table 3-102 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
SET BAT TMA20 DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,INSTALLATION_DATE="123433",INSTALLATION_ID="21",BASE_STATION_ID
="1",SECTOR_ID="123232",BEARING="123",MECHANICAL_TILT="31",MODEL_N
UMBER="2",SERIAL_NUMBER="422422",FREQUENCY_BAND="23",BEAMWIDTH
="32",GAIN="1",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-71
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.37 SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA

Function
This command queries data stored in the RETC device of the V1.1 protocol, which
includes the installation date, installer ID, NE ID, sector ID, antenna direction, mechanical
tilt, antenna serial number, frequency band, beamwidth, and band gain.
To query initial installation information of a device during commissioning or device
replacement, use this command. The data stored in the RETC device is queried after
the command is executed successfully. If the command is executed unsuccessfully, the
failure cause is displayed.
Command
SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,S
HELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-103.
Table 3-103 SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-104.
3-72
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-104 SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-105 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to query data for the AISG device (sub-network ID =
0, NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and
AISG device ID =1) in batches.
SHOW BAT RET11 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AIS
GDEVICE=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Installer ID: 11; NE ID: 11; Sector ID: 11;
Rows: 1
3-73
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.38 SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA

Function
This command queries data stored in the ACOM device of the V1.1 protocol, such as the
installation date, installer ID, NE ID, sector ID, antenna direction, mechanical tilt, ACOM
model, ACOM serial number, and ACOM type.
replacement, use this command. The data stored in the ACOM device is queried after
Command
SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,S
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-106.
Table 3-106 SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-107.
3-74
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-107 SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-108 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AI
SGDEVICE=1,RADIO=ALL;
Rows: 1
3-75
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.39 SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA

Function
This command queries data stored in the TMA device of the V2.0 protocol, such as the
installation date, installer ID, NE ID, sector ID, antenna direction, mechanical tilt, ATMA
model, ATMA serial number, and ATMA type.
replacement, use this command. The data stored in the ATMA device is queried after
Command
SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,S
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-109.
Table 3-109 SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-110.
3-76
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-110 SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-111 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
SHOW BAT TMA20 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AI
Rows: 1
3-77
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.40 SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA

Function
This command queries data stored in the RETC device of the V2.0 protocol, which
includes the installation date, installer ID, NE ID, sector ID, antenna direction, mechanical
tilt, antenna serial number, frequency band, beamwidth, and band gain.
replacement, use this command. The data stored in the RETC device is queried after
Command
SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,S
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-112.
Table 3-112 SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-113.
3-78
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-113 SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-114 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
SHOW BAT RET20 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AIS
GDEVICE=0,RADIO=ALL;
Rows: 1
3.1.41 SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA

Function
AISG2.0 Batch Query Wave Trap Device Data
3-79
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Command
SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK
=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<R
ADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA, refer
to Table 3-115.
Table 3-115 SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA, refer
to Table 3-116.
Table 3-116 SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Devcie Data
STRING
Table 3-117 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-80
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to query data of the device, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU
result is Failed.
SHOW BAT NOTCHFILTER DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SL
OT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Failed Time-out
Rows: 1
3.1.42 SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA

Function
AISG1.1 Batch Query TMA Device Data
Command
SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,S
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-118.
Table 3-118 SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET
SubNet ID
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
3-81
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
2
NE
NE ID
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA, refer to Table
3-119.
Table 3-119 SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Devcie Data
STRING
Table 3-120 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to query data of the device, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU
3-82
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
result is Failed.
SHOW BAT TMA11 DEVICE DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AI
1 Failed Time-out
Rows: 1
3.1.43 SET BAT RET20 DATA

Function
AISG2.0 Batch Set Antenna Device Data
Command
SET BAT RET20 DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
LF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>[,INSTALLATION_DATE=<INSTALL
ATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATION_ID=<BAS
E_STATION_ID>][,SECTOR_ID=<SECTOR_ID>][,BEARING=<BEARING>][,MECHANICA
L_TILT=<MECHANICAL_TILT>][,MODEL_NUMBER=<MODEL_NUMBER>][,SERIAL_N
UMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,FREQUENCY_BAND=<FREQUENCY_BAND>][,BEAMW
IDTH=<BEAMWIDTH>][,GAIN=<GAIN>],RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SET BAT RET20 DATA, refer to Table 3-121.
Table 3-121 SET BAT RET20 DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
3-83
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
6
AISGDE-
Object ID
VICE
of AISG
Instance
Count
INT
1~12
Required
STRING
0~9999
ANY
device
7
INSTAL-
Installa-
LATION_
tion date
OPTION
DATE
8
INSTAL-
Installer's
LA-
ID
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
TION_ID
9
BASE-
NE ID
STRING
0~9999
_STA-
ANY
OPTION
TION_ID
10
SEC-
Sector ID
STRING
0~9999
TOR_ID
11
BEARING
OPTION
Antenna
STRING
0~9999
bearing
12
ANY
ME-
Installed
CHANI-
mechani-
CAL_TILT
cal tilt(de-
ANY
OPTION
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
grees)
13
MODEL_
Antenna
NUMBER
model
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
number
14
SERIAL_
Antenna
NUMBER
serial
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
number
15
FRE-
Fre-
QUENCY-
quency
_BAND
band(M-
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
Hz)
16
BEAMWI-
Beam-
DTH
width
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
for each
band(deg)
17
GAIN
Gain for
STRING
0~9999
each
ANY
OPTION
band(dBi)
18
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
3-84
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SET BAT RET20 DATA, refer to Table 3-122.
Table 3-122 SET BAT RET20 DATA Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-123 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
result is Failed.
SET BAT RET20 DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,INSTALLATION_DATE="0",INSTALLATION_ID="0",BASE_STATION_ID="0",SEC
TOR_ID="0",BEARING="0",MECHANICAL_TILT="0",MODEL_NUMBER="0"[,SERIAL
_NUMBER="0",FREQUENCY_BAND="0",BEAMWIDTH="0",GAIN="0",RADIO=ALL;
1 Failed Time-out
Rows: 1
3-85
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.44 SHOW DEVICE

Function
This command queries information of antenna accessories (TMA, RET, wave trap) that
support AISG protocol, including software version, hardware version, serial number, and
type.
To check information of antenna accessories, use this command.
The software version, hardware version, serial number and type of the current device
are displayed after the command is executed successfully. If the command is executed
unsuccessfully, failure causes are displayed.
Syntax
SHOW DEVICE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,S
LOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW DEVICE command, refer to Table
3-124.
Table 3-124 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW DEVICE Command
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
NE
RACK
Description
Type
Range
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99999
Inte-
1~255
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
SHELF
Inte-
None
SLOT
Inte-
1~255
None
AISGDE-
AISG device ID
Inte-
VICE
7
RADIO
1~255
None
Enum
Re-
Re-
quired
1~12
None
ger
Radio
quired
ger
6
Required
ger
5
quired
ger
4
Re-
Re-
quired
-
Re-
quired
3-86
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW DEVICE command, refer to Table
3-125.
Table 3-125 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW DEVICE Command
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Displays detailed information of the operation. If
Charac-
the operation fails, this command shows failure
ter
details. If the operation succeeds, this command

displays ---.
3
PRODNR
Indicates the product number.
Charac-
ter
4
SERNO
Indicates the serial number of the device.
Charac-
ter
5
HWVER-
Indicates the hardware version.
Charac-
SION
6
SWVER-
ter
Indicates the software version.
Charac-
SION
ter
Table 3-126 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to query information of the device, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0,
RRU rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is 1, and AISG device ID
is 1. The command is executed successfully, and queried information is returned, in which
3-87
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
the operation result is Successful, product number is RDA-3, UID is 00013CN0100153781,

hardware version is 332, and software version is RA3_235B.
SHOW DEVICE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RADI
O=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |PRODNR|UID |HWVERSION|SWVERSION
1 Successful RDA-3 00013CN0100153781 332 RA3_235B
Rows: 1
3.1.45 SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE

Function
This command queries the manufacturer certificate. After the command is successfully
executed, the system shows the manufacturer certificate.
This command applies when you want to query the manufacturer certificate. The
manufacturer certificate contains the following information: valid time, issuer, owner,
algorithm, and sequence number.
Syntax
SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE command,
Table 3-127 SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
Integer
ID
2
NE
Operated NE ID
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE
3-88
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-128 SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
SUBJECT
Charac-
ter
Subject
Charac-
ter
4
SEQUENCE
Sequence number
Charac-
ter
5
BEFORE-
Valid start time
Charac-
DATE
6
AFTER-
ter
Valid end time
Charac-
DATE
7
ISSUER
ter
Issuer
Charac-
ter
8
ALGO-
Algorithm
Charac-
RITHM
ter
Examples
The following example shows how to query the manufacturer certificate of the NE
(sub-network ID = 0, and NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW DEVICE CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=0,NE=0;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information | Subject | Sequence Number | Valid From |
Valid Through | Issuer | Algorithm Info
1 Successful 2013-03-19 07:44:54 GMT 2015-03-19 07:44:54 GMT C=CN, O=ZTE,

CN=Femto Root CA ST=Some-State, C=CN, O=ZTE, CN=segw sha1WithRSAEncryption
150a0b326fbf55efc8b1f7bfcd8dab7c
Rows: 1
3-89
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.46 SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE

Function
This command queries the operator certificate. After the command is successfully
executed, the system shows the operator certificate.
This command applies when you want to query the operator certificate. The operator
certificate contains the following information: valid time, issuer, owner, algorithm, and
sequence number.
Syntax
SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO
>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-129 SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Enum
RADIO
Radio
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-130 SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
SUBJECT
Charac-
ter
Subject
Charac-
ter
3-90
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
SEQUENCE
Sequence number
Charac-
ter
5
BEFORE-
Valid start time
Charac-
DATE
6
AFTER-
ter
Valid end time
Charac-
DATE
7
ISSUER
ter
Issuer
Charac-
ter
8
ALGO-
Algorithm
Charac-
RITHM
ter
Examples
The following example shows how to query the operator certificate of the NE (sub-network
ID = 0, and NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Subject | Sequence Number | Valid From | Valid
Through | Issuer | Algorithm Info
1 Successful 2013-03-19 07:44:54 GMT 2015-03-19 07:44:54 GMT C=CN, O=ZTE,
CN=Femto Root CA ST=Some-State, C=CN, O=ZTE, CN=segw sha1WithRSAEncryption
150a0b326fbf55efc8b1f7bfcd8dab7c
Rows: 1
3.1.47 DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE

Function
This command deletes the operator certificate.
executed, the operator certificated is deleted.
After this command is successfully
This command applies when the certificate expires or requires to be updated.

The operator certificate contains the user certificate, private key, and CA link file.
3-91
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-131 DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-132 DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Output Parameter
Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Character
Character
eter
1
RESULT
DETAIL
Examples
The following example shows how to delete the operator certificate of the NE (sub-network
DELETE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-92
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.48 UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE

Function
This command updates the operator certificate when the certificate is about to expire.
This command applies when the operator certificate is about to expire and you want to
manually update the certificate.
After this command is successfully executed, the operator certificate is updated.
Syntax
UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-133 UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Input Parameter
Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE
Table 3-134 UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE Command Output Parameter
Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
3-93
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to update the operator certificate of the NE (sub-network
UPDATE OPERATOR CERTIFICATE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.49 SHOW USER INFO

Function
This command queries system user information, including the SSH user and TELNET
user information. The information contains the user name and user level (administrator or
ordinary user).
This command applies when you want to query the current SSH user and TELNET user
information.
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the current SSH user and
TELNET user information.
Syntax
SHOW USER INFO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW USER INFO command, refer to
Table 3-135.
Table 3-135 SHOW USER INFO Command Input User Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Radio
Enum
3-94
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW USER INFO command, refer to
Table 3-136.
Table 3-136 SHOW USER INFO Command Output User Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
User name
Character
User level
Character

3
USERNAME
USERLEVEL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the user information of the NE (sub-network
SHOW USER INFO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information | UserName | UserLevel
1 Successful root administrator

2 Successful zte administrator
Rows: 2
3.1.50 UPDATE USER INFO

Function
This command adds, deletes, and modifies of SSH and Telnet user information of the
system.
The user information is updated after the command is executed successfully. If the
command is executed unsuccessfully, user information will not be updated, and failure
records are stored in the /mnt/flash/BSP/SystemUserLog.txt, which can be downloaded
to the local disk and viewed by using the ftp tool on the OMMB.
Scenarios:
l
One or more users need to be added.

3-95
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
l
l
One or more users need to be deleted.

One or more users passwords need to be modified.
Effect on the system: The system user information is changed.
Syntax
UPDATE USER INFO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,OPTYPE=<OPTYPE>,USERLE
VEL=<USERLEVEL>,USERNAME=<USERNAME>,PASSWORD=<PASSWORD>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UPDATE USER INFO command, refer to
Table 3-137.
Table 3-137 Input Parameter Descriptions for the UPDATE USER INFO Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
Integer
configurations
2
NE
OPTYPE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
None
None
Operation type
Enu-
Refer
merated
to Table
type
3-139
None
Enu-
Refer
LEVEL
or ordinary user
merated
to Table
type
3-140
Charac-
0~21474
ter
00000
Charac-
0~21474
ter
00000
User name
Password
WORD
Re-
quired
User level, administrator
PASS-
Value
9999
NAME
6
In-
quired
USER-
USER-
Op-
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UPDATE USER INFO command, refer
to Table 3-138.
Table 3-138 Output Parameter Descriptions for the UPDATE USER INFO Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
SULT
Charac-
ter
3-96
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
2
DETAIL
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the Operation Type parameter, refer to Table 3-139.
Table 3-139 Operation Type
Macro Name
Description
ADD
Add
MODIFY
Modify
DELETE
Delete
For the enumeration information of the User Level parameter, refer to Table 3-140.
Table 3-140 User Level
Macro Name
Description
ROOT
Administrator
NORMAL
Normal user
Examples
Execute the command to update user information of the NE, whose subnet ID is 0, and NE
ID is 0. Parameter information: the operation type is ADD, user level is NORMAL, user
name is user, and user password is user!123.The command is executed successfully, and
information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful.
UPDATE USER INFO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,OPTYPE=ADD,USERLEVEL=NORMAL,USER
NAME="user",PASSWORD="user!123";
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-97
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.51 SHOW ACCESS LOG

Function
This command queries the logs about the OMM logs in/out to/of the NE. The log information
contains the user name, user level, administration type, login/logout, IP address, port
number, and operation time.
User name: user who logged in to the NE, includes the default user name and LMT
authorized user name set in the OMMB dynamic management.
User level: unauthenticated, read-only, read&write, and super.
Administration type: OMMB, EOMS, EDMS, EPMS, and EFMS.
IP address and port number: IP address and port number of the host that logs in to the NE.
Operation time: the time on the NE when a login occurs.
This command applies when you want to query the historical logs about NE login/logout.
If this command is successfully executed, the system shows the login/logout logs of the
NE. If this command fails, error information is returned.
Syntax
SHOW ACCESS LOG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW ACCESS LOG command, refer to
Table 3-141.
Table 3-141 SHOW ACCESS LOG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW ACCESS LOG command, refer
to Table 3-142.
3-98
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-142 SHOW ACCESS LOG Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
USER-
Charac-
ter
User name
Charac-
NAME
4
USER-
MAN-
User level
Charac-
ACTION-
Terminal type
Charac-
ADDRESS
ter
Operation type
Charac-
TYPE
7
ter
AGETYPE
6
ter
LEVEL
5
ter
IP address
Charac-
ter
8
PORT
IP port number
Charac-
ter
9
OPTIME
Operation time
Charac-
ter
Table 3-143 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the logs of the NE (sub-network ID = 0, and
NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
3-99
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
SHOW ACCESS LOG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;

- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | User Name | User Level | Manage Type | Action
Type | IP address | IP Port | Operation Time
1 Successful zteomcuser Unauthenticated user OMMB login 60.1.200.27 64388

2013-02-07 15:21:17
2 Successful zteomcuser Unauthenticated user OMMB logout 60.1.200.27 64388
2013-02-07 15:21:18
Rows: 2
3.1.52 UPLOAD LOG

Function
This command obtains a specified file on the RRU. To know the content of a specified file
on the RRU, use this command. After this command is executed successfully, the upload
result and the file storage location on the OMMB are displayed on the OMMB. Impact on
the system: none.
Command
UPLOAD LOG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
T=<SLOT>,LOGTYPE=<LOGTYPE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of UPLOAD LOG, refer to Table 3-144.
Table 3-144 UPLOAD LOG Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot
INT
1~255
Required
LOG-
Log Type
ENUME
Required
Radio
ENUME
Required
TYPE
7
RADIO
3-100
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of UPLOAD LOG, refer to Table 3-145.
Table 3-145 UPLOAD LOG Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
FILEPATH
Path
STRING
For a description of Log Type Enumerate Type, refer to Table 3-146.
Table 3-146 Log Type
Macro
Meanings
ALARM
Alarm Log
USER
User Log
SYSTEM
System Log
ORDER
Order Log
INTERFERENCE
Interference Log

Table 3-147 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command upload log, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number is 51,
shelf number is 1 and slot number is 1. The command is executed, and the operation
result is Successful.
UPLOAD LOG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,LOGTYPE=ALARM,RA
DIO=ALL;
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Path

1
Successful
D:\netnumen\ommb\ums\ums-svr\tmp\ftp\ddm\
ddmOperationLogUpload_0_0_51_1_1.log
Rows: 1
3.1.53 CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS

Function
This command clears the LMT modification flag saved in the NE.
When the LMT accesses an NE and modifies data, the modification flag is set to 1. This
command applies when you want to set the modification flag to 0.
This command should be executed after each data modification through the LMT.
If this command is successfully executed, the modification flag of the NE is set to 0,
otherwise, error information is returned.
Impact on the system: The NE starts to record whether the LMT modifies the NE data.
Syntax
CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the LMT MODIFY STATUS command, refer to
Table 3-148.
Table 3-148 CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
o.
1
SUBNET
Integer
ID
2
NE
Operated NE ID
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the LMT MODIFY STATUS command, refer
to Table 3-149.
3-102
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-149 CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL
Table 3-150 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to clear the LMT modification flag of the NE
(sub-network ID =0, and NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
CLEAN LMT MODIFY STATUS:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.54 DISCONNECT LMT

Function
This command disconnects by force the connection between the LMT and NE.
3-103
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command applies when you want to modify the NE data through the OMMB but the
LMT has accessed the NE.
If the command is successfully executed, the LMT connection is disconnected by force,
otherwise, error information is returned.
Impact on the system: The LMT connection is disconnected by force. If you want to operate
the NE through the LMT, log in to the NE by using the LMT.
Syntax
DISCONNECT LMT:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,MANAGETYPE=<MANAGETYP
E>,ID=<ID>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the DISCONNECT LMT command, refer to
Table 3-151.
Table 3-151 DISCONNECT LMT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
Description
Operated
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
sub-network ID
2
NE
Operated NE ID
999
3
MAN-
Terminal type
AGETYPE
Enumer-
Refer
ated type
to Table
3-153
ID
Connection ID
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the DISCONNECT LMT command, refer to
Table 3-152.
Table 3-152 DISCONNECT LMT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
MAN-
Charac-
ter
Terminal type
Charac-
AGETYPE
ter
3-104
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the Manage Type parameter, refer to Table 3-153.
Table 3-153 Manage Type
Macro
Description
EFMS
EFMS
EOMS
EOMS
EPMS
EPMS
EDMS
EDMS
OMMBTOOL
OMMBTOOL
MML
MML
MTS
MTS
OMMBPUBLIC
OMMB-PUBLIC
OMMB
OMMB

Table 3-154 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to disconnect the LMT connection of the NE
(sub-network ID = 0, and NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
DISCONNECT LMT:SUBNET=0,NE=0,MANAGETYPE=EFM,ID=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Detailed Information | Manage Type
1 Successful EFMS
Rows: 1
3-105
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.55 Set LMT Authorization

Function
This command adds or deletes user name information used by the LMT access NE.
The user name, password, and access authority of the LMT access NE requires to be
authorized. The information is forwarded to the NE through this command. The access
authority includes unauthorized user, read-only user, read-write user, and super user.
When the LMT access NE requires valid user name, password, and access authority, the
authority is forwarded to the NE through this command on the OMMB. The Ne uses the
authorization information to decide whether the LMT user login is legal.
After the command is successfully executed, the user name, password, and access
authority of the LMT login is added or deleted. If the command is executed unsuccessfully,
error information is returned.
Impact on the system: The LMT user name is added or deleted. The user can use the
added user name to log in to the base station or cannot log in to the base station by using
the deleted user name.
Syntax
SET LMT AUTHOR:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,OPTYPE=<OPTYPE>,USERLEV
EL=<USERLEVEL>,USERNAME=<USERNAME>,PASSWORD=<PASSWORD>,RADI
O=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET LMT AUTHOR command, refer to
Table 3-155.
Table 3-155 SET LMT AUTHOR Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
o.
1
SUBNET
Subnet ID
Integer
in operation
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
configurations
2
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
USER-
User level
LEVEL
0~99999
9999
Enumera-
Refer
tion
to Table
3-157
USER-
User name.
Character
NAME
5
PASS-
0~21474
00000
Password
Character
WORD
0~21474
00000
3-106
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
o.
6
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET LMT AUTHOR command, refer to
Table 3-156.
Table 3-156 SET LMT AUTHOR Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Failure reason. If the operation fails, this
Charac-
command shows failure details, otherwise, it
ter
shows ---.
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the user authority enumeration parameter, refer to Table
3-157.
Table 3-157 User Authorities
Macro
Description
UNCKECK
Unauthorized user
READ
Read-only user
READW
Read-write user
SUPER
Super user

Table 3-158 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-107
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to set the user level to UNCHECK, user name to
user, and password to user@123 on the NE whose subnet number is 0 and NE number
is 0. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result is Success.
SET LMT AUTHOR:SUBNET=0,NE=0,USERLEVEL=UNCKECK,USERNAME="user
",PASSWORD="user@123",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows:1
3.1.56 SHOW LMT AUTHOR

Function
This command queries user information of the LMT access NE, including user name,
password, and access authority of the LMT.
This command is executed when the information of the current legal LMT login user
requires to be queried.
If the command is successfully executed, the current LMT user information is returned.
Otherwise, the error information is returned.
Syntax
SHOW LMT AUTHOR:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW LMT AUTHOR command, refer to
Table 3-159.
Table 3-159 SHOW LMT AUTHOR Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RADIO
Radio
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Enum
3-108
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW LMT AUTHOR command, refer
to Table 3-160.
Table 3-160 SHOW LMT AUTHOR Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
USER-
Charac-
ter
User name.
Charac-
NAME
4
USER-
ter
User level
Charac-
LEVEL
ter
Table 3-161 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the LMT authorization on an NE with subnet
ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the operation is successful, the result Success, the user name user,
and user level UNCHECK are returned.
SHOW LMT AUTHOR:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |User Name |User Level
1 Successful user UNCKECK
3-109
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Rows: 1
3.1.57 OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG

Function
This command opens the authorization flag of the LMT access NE. When the LMT is
accessed, whether the NE base station requires authorizing the user name and password
of the LMT access depends on the authorization flag.
This command is used when the LMT login user requires to be authorized.
If the command is successfully executed, the LMT access authorization is successful.
Impact on the system: The LMT subsequent login requires legal user information
authorized by the EMS for normal login.
Syntax
OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
Table 3-162 OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RADIO
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
99
Integer
configurations
3
0~9999
Default
quired
0~9999
None
99999
Radio
Enum
Re-
quired
-
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
3-110
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-163 OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
eter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-164 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to perform the LMT access authorization on an NE with
subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result is
Success.
OPEN LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-111
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.58 CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG

Function
This command closes the authorization flag of the LMT access NE. When the LMT is
This command is used when the LMT login user does not require to be authorized.
If the command is successfully executed, the LMT access authorization is closed.
Impact on the system: The LMT subsequent login does not require legal user information
authorized by the OMMB for normal login.
Syntax
CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
Table 3-165 CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
ter
1
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
configurations
ger
NE
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
Radio
Enum
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
Table 3-166 CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
3-112
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-167 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to close the LMT access authorization on an NE with
Successful.
CLOSE LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.59 SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG

Function
This command shows the authorization flag of the LMT access NE. When the LMT is
This command is used when the LMT login user authorization flag requires to be queried.
If the command is successfully executed, the LMT access authorization flag is returned.
3-113
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
Table 3-168 SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Sub-network ID in
Inte-
0~99999
NET
operation configurations
ger
NE
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
Radio
Enum
RADIO
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG command,
Table 3-169 SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
command shows failure details, otherwise, it
ter
shows ---.
3
FLAG
LMT access authorization flag
Charac-
ter
Table 3-170 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
3-114
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to show the LMT access authorization flag on an NE
with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result
is Successful. Otherwise, the LMT access authorization flag is Close.
SHOW LMT AUTHOR FLAG:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |LMT Author Flag
1 Successful Close
Rows: 1
3.1.60 SHOW NE CONNECTION

Function
This command queries the current NE connection information. The information contains
the user name, user level, administration type, login/logout, IP address, port number, and
operation time.
User name: user who logged in to the NE.
User level: unauthenticated, read-only, read&write, and super.
Administration type: OMMB, EOMS, EDMS, EPMS, and EFMS.
IP address and port number: IP address and port number of the host that logs in to the NE.
Operation time: the time on the NE when a login occurs.
This command applies when you want to query the NE information.
If this command is successfully executed, the system shows the current NE information.
If this command fails, error information is returned.
Syntax
SHOW NE CONNECTION:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-115
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW NE CONNECTION command, refer
to Table 3-171.
Table 3-171 SHOW NE CONNECTION Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
SUBNET
NE
RADIO
Description
Type
Range
Operated sub-
Inte-
0~99999
network ID
ger
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Enum
Radio
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW NE CONNECTION command,
Table 3-172 SHOW NE CONNECTION Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

3
USERNAME
User name
Character
USERLEVEL
User level
Character
MAN-
Terminal type
Character
AGETYPE
6
ID
Connection ID
Character
ADDRESS
IP address
Character
PORT
IP port number
Character
CNTIME
Login time
Character
Table 3-173 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-116
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the NE connection information (sub-network
SHOW NE CONNECTION:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | User Name | User Level | Manage Type |
Connection ID |IP Address | IP Port | Connect Time
1 Successful zteomcuser Unauthenticated user OMMB 50 60.1.200.27 64388

2013-03-06 12:58:18
Rows: 1
3.1.61 SHOW LINK

Function
This command queries the link status. When configuration fields are normally set, the link
created between the EMS and NE is identified.
When the link between the EMS and NE is created unsuccessfully, this command is used
to query setting that the EMS performs on the link fields.
After the command is executed successfully, the enable status, manual link disconnection
status, maintenance status, and cutover status of the link is returned.
Syntax
SHOW LINK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-117
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW LINK command, refer to Table
3-174.
Table 3-174 SHOW LINK Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RADIO
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
None
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
quired
0~99999
None
9999
Radio
Enum
Re-
quired
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW LINK command, refer to Table
3-175.
Table 3-175 SHOW LINK Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

3
LINK
Link is enabled.
Character
BROKEN
Link is broken manually.
Character
MAINTE-
Maintenance status
Character
Cutover status
Character
NACE
6
CUTOVER
Table 3-176 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
3-118
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the link status of the NE with subnet ID 0 and
NE ID 0. If the query is successful, the result is Successful, link enabled is Yes, manual
link broken is no, maintenance status is Normal, and cutover status is Normal.
SHOW LINK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |Link Enabled |Manual Link Broken |Maintenance
Status |Cutover Status
1 Successful Yes No Normal Normal
Row(s): 1
3.1.62 LINK BREAK

Function
This command disconnects a link between the EMS and a NE. The link disconnection
is implemented through manual change on link creation fields in the configuration
management.
This command can be used when the link between the EMS and NE is disconnected..
After the command is executed successfully, the link between the EMS and the NE is
disconnected.
disconnected.
Syntax
LINK BREAK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the LINK BREAK command, refer to Table
3-177.
3-119
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-177 LINK BREAK Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Required
999
3
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the LINK BREAK command, refer to Table
3-178.
Table 3-178 LINK BREAK Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-179 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to disconnect the link between the EMS and NE with
Successful.
3-120
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
LINK BREAK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.63 LINK RESTORE

Function
This command restores a link between the EMS and a NE. The link connection
is implemented through manual change on link creation fields in the configuration
management.
This command can be used when the disconnected link between the EMS and NE requires
to be restored.
restored.
Syntax
LINK RESTORE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the LINK RESTORE command, refer to Table
3-180.
Table 3-180 LINK RESTORE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
Required
eter
1
SUB-
Operated sub-
Inte-
NET
network ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
Enum
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the LINK RESTORE command, refer to Table
3-181.
3-121
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-181 LINK RESTORE Command Output Parameter Descriptions

No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Table 3-182 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to restore the link between the EMS and NE with
subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result
is Successful.
LINK RESTORE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.64 BLOCK NE
Function
This command blocks NEs. After a NE is blocked, all services on the NE are interrupted.
3-122
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
This command can be used when the service requires to be interrupted. When the NE
and service of this mode require to be restored, you can use the UNBLOCK NE command
to unblock the NE.
After the command is executed, the service detects that the mode is blocked, which will
trigger the deletion of the NE to cause the service interruption.
Impact on the system: The blocked service is interrupted.
Syntax
BLOCK NE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the BLOCK NE command, refer to Table 3-183.
Table 3-183 BLOCK NE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
Required
eter
1
SUB-
Inte-
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
Enum
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the BLOCK NE command, refer to Table
3-184.
Table 3-184 BLOCK NE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-185 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-123
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to block the NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the
command is executed successfully, the returned result is Successful.
BLOCK NE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.65 UNBLOCK NE
Function
This command unblocks NEs. After a NE is unblocked, all services on the NE are restored.
After the command is executed, the service detects that the NE is unblocked, which will
trigger the creation of the NE to cause the service recovery.
Impact on the system: The NE service is restored.
Syntax
UNBLOCK NE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UNBLOCK NE command, refer to Table
3-186.
3-124
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-186 UNBLOCK NE Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Enum
RADIO
Radio
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UNBLOCK NE command, refer to Table
3-187.
Table 3-187 UNBLOCK NE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-188 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to unblock the NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the
UNBLOCK NE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
3-125
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)

1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.66 SHOW NE
Function
Query NE Status
Command
SHOW NE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-189 shows the input parameters of SHOW NE.
Table 3-189 SHOW NE Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
Output Parameters
Table 3-190 shows the output parameters of SHOW NE.
Table 3-190 SHOW NE Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
BLOCK
STRING
Block Status
GSMBLOCK
STRING
GSM Block Status
UMTSBLOCK
STRING
UMTS Block
Status
6
CDMABLOCK
STRING
CDMA Block
Status
3-126
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
TDSBLOCK
STRING
TD-SCDMA Block
Status
8
FDDBLOCK
STRING
LTE FDD Block
Status
9
TDDBLOCK
STRING
LTE TDD Block
Status
Example
The following example shows how to query the status of the NE whose subnet ID is 0 and
NE ID is 0. The query is successful, and the returned result is Successful.
SHOW NE:SUBNET=0,NE=0;
- System command No.
|Operation Result |Failure Reason |BLOCK |GSMBLOCK |UMTSBLOCK
|CDMABLOCK |TDSBLOCK |FDDBLOCK |TDDBLOCK
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.67 RESET NE
Function
This command resets NEs, including BBUs and RRUs. Resetting a NE may interrupt the
service. Therefore, be careful in this operation.
When all services of a NE are interrupted and they cannot be restored after
troubleshooting, you can reset the NE and check whether it can run properly.
After the command is executed successfully, the NE is reset and NE services are
disconnected.
Syntax
RESET NE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET NE command, refer to Table 3-191.
3-127
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-191 RESET NE Command Input Parameter Descriptions

No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
eter
1
SUB-
Inte-
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET NE command, refer to Table
3-192.
Table 3-192 RESET NE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
ter
1
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Examples
The following example shows how to reset the NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the
RESET NE:SUBNET=0,NE=0;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Fail Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.68 RESET PRODUCT

Function
This command resets a product mode. The EMS selects a mode to execute the command.
If the mode information of the board is the same as that selected by the EMS, the mode
is reset. Multi-mode RRUs are not reset. For multi-mode base band boards in the BBU
shelf, only the mode selected by the EMS and the mode on the CC board are reset.
When the product process is upgraded independently or the product process has
abnormality, this command is used to reset the product mode.
3-128
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
After the command is executed successfully, all boards belonging to a mode are reset.
This mode process on the CC board is reset finally.
Impact on the system: the NE services of this mode are interrupted temporarily. After the
NE is reset, the services are restored.
Syntax
RESET PRODUCT:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET PRODUCT command, refer to
Table 3-193.
Table 3-193 RESET PRODUCT Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Product mode
Enu-
meration
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET PRODUCT command, refer to
Table 3-194.
Table 3-194 RESET PRODUCT Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-195 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
3-129
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to reset a product mode of the NE with subnet ID 0,
NE ID 0, and mode UMTS. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result
is Successful.
RESET PRODUCT:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=UMTS;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.69 RESET RADIO

Function
This command resets the product process of a mode selected by the EMS.
When the faults related to services occur (for example, the resource is in deadlock), alarm
might not occur on the system, but the performance KPI index will be decreased. At this
time, you can reset the corresponding product process to solve the problem.
After the command is executed successfully, the product process is reset and NE services
are disconnected.
Impact on the system: the NE services of this mode are interrupted temporarily. After the
product process is reset, the services are restored.
Syntax
RESET RADIO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-130
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET RADIO command, refer to Table
3-196.
Table 3-196 RESET RADIO Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
Operated sub-
Integer
0~99999
network ID
2
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
RADIO
Product mode
Enumer-
ation
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET RADIO command, refer to Table
3-197.
Table 3-197 RESET RADIO Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-198 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-131
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to reset the product process of the NE with subnet ID
0, NE ID 0, and mode UMTS. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result
is Successful.
RESET RADIO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=UMTS;
-System Command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.70 RESET RGPS

Function
This command resets the GPS equipment remotely and manually.
When the EMS reports that BBU fails to receive messages from RGB or the clock signal
is abnormal, the receiving machine on RGB is abnormal, and environment information of
the RGB version cannot be queried, this command can be used.
After this command is successfully executed, the RGPS is reset.
Impact on the system: The clock source is abnormal in several minutes, which can cause
clock alarm report. It does not affect the system performance.
Syntax
RESET RGPS:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RECEIVER=<RECEIVER>,RADIO=<R
ADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET RGPS command, refer to Table
3-199.
Table 3-199 RESET RGPS Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
Operated sub-
NET
network ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
3-132
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
3
RECEI-
Resets the external
Enumer-
Refer
VER
receiving machine
ation
to Table
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
Required
3-201
4
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET RGPS command, refer to Table
3-200.
Table 3-200 RESET RGPS Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of resetting external receiving machine, refer to Table
3-201.
Table 3-201 Resetting the External Receiving Machine
Macro
Description
BACK
Back plane
FRONT
Panel

Table 3-202 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-133
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to reset the RGPS of the NE with subnet ID 0 and
NE ID 0, and reset the external receiving machine to Back. If the command is executed
successfully, the returned result is Successful.
RESET RGPS:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RECEIVER=BACK,RADIO=ALL;
- System Command No. | Operation Result | Fail Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.71 RESET RF
Function
This command resets the RF subsystem, that is, performs soft reset on all RRUs that are
configured, and at same time resets all boards on the RRU side. If there are cascading
RRUs, they are also reset.
When the network management system reports RRU alarms, for example RRU internal
lock lost, this command is used. The RRUs can recover from the failure through soft reset.
After this command is executed successfully, all RRUs are soft reset.
Effect on the system: When all RRUs are reset, services on RRUs are interrupted. Be
cautious about this operation.
Syntax
RESET RF:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET RF command, refer to Table 3-203.
Table 3-203 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET RF Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RACK
Rack ID
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Integer
1~255
3-134
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
4
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET RF command, refer to Table
3-204.
Table 3-204 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET RF Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
Table 3-205 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to reset the NE, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and rack number
is 51. The command is executed successfully, and information is returned, in which the
operation result is Successful.
RESET RF:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,RADIO=ALL;
3-135
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.72 RESET BASEBAND

Function
This command powers off and resets the baseband subsystem, that is, the BBU. All the
boards in the shelf are reset, and services are interrupted.
When the network management system reports alarms about service interruption, for
example BBU fault, or when the eNodeB cannot run properly due to faults, this command
can be used. The eNodeB can recover from the failure by powering off and resetting the
BBU.
After the command is executed successfully, the BBU is powered off and all boards in the
shelf are reset.
Effect on the system: When the BBU is powered off and reset, all the services of the
eNodeB are interrupted. Be cautious about this operation.
Syntax
RESET BASEBAND:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,SUBRACK=<SUBRACK>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET BASEBAND command, refer to
Table 3-206.
Table 3-206 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET BASEBAND Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
SUB-
Subrack ID
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Integer
1~255
RACK
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET BASEBAND command, refer to
Table 3-207.
3-136
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-207 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET BASEBAND Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter

displays ---.
Examples
Execute the command to reset the baseband subsystem of NE, whose subnet ID is 0,
NE ID is 0, and rack number is 1. The command is executed successfully, and queried
RESET BASEBAND:SUBNET=0,NE=0,SUBRACK=1;
- System command No. | Operation Result| Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.73 RESET BOARD

Function
This command resets boards. Select the boards to be reset, and then execute this
command. If the boards are present and normal, they will be soft reset.
When boards are faulty and cannot run properly, this command can be used.
After this command is successfully executed, the boards are soft reset.
Effect on the system: When boards are reset, their functions become unavailable, and
relevant boards cannot be used, so services are affected. The boards recover to normal
status after they are reset.
Syntax
RESET BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,S
3-137
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET BOARD command, refer to Table
3-208.
Table 3-208 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET BOARD Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
0~99999
9999
RACK
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET BOARD command, refer to Table
3-209.
Table 3-209 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET BOARD Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-210 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)

3-138
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to reset the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number
is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed successfully, and
queried information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful.
RESET BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Fail Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.74 SHOW BOARD RADIO

Function
Query Board Radio
Command
SHOW BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
LF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-211 shows the input parameters of SHOW BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-211 SHOW BOARD RADIO Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
3-139
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
6
RADIO
Radio
Instance
Count
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-212 shows the output parameters of SHOW BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-212 SHOW BOARD RADIO Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
ADMIN
STRING
Administrative
Status
4
MASTER
STRING
Master or Slave
SERVICE
STRING
Active(or
Standby) Status
6
INIT
STRING
Initialization
Status
7
SAVE
STRING
Save Power
Status
8
ALARM
STRING
Alarm Status
PERFORM
STRING
Performance
Status
10
GSMBLOCK
STRING
GSM Block Status
11
UMTSBLOCK
STRING
UMTS Block
Status
12
CDMABLOCK
STRING
CDMA Block
Status
13
TDSBLOCK
STRING
TD-SCDMA Block
Status
14
FDDBLOCK
STRING
LTE FDD Block
Status
15
TDDBLOCK
STRING
LTE TDD Block
Status
16
POWER
STRING
Manual Power
Status
3-140
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-213 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to query the board information (sub-network ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =1). The query is successful,
the returned result is Successful, the operational status is Failed, master or slave is Master,
the service status is Available, the initial status is Normal, the power saving status is
Normal, the alarm status is Normal, the performance status is Normal, the blocked status
of all systems is Unblocked, and the manual power status is Powered-on.
SHOW BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason |ADMIN |MASTER |SERVICE |INIT |SAVE |ALARM
|PERFORM |GSMBLOCK |UMTSBLOCK |CDMABLOCK |TDSBLOCK |FDDBLOCK
|TDDBLOCK |POWER
1 Successful Successful Failed Active Available Normal Normal Normal Normal

Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Powered-on
Rows: 1
3.1.75 RESET BOARD RADIO

Function
Reset Board Radio
Command
RESET BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
3-141
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
Table 3-214 shows the input parameters of RESET BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-214 RESET BOARD RADIO Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-215 shows the output parameters of RESET BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-215 RESET BOARD RADIO Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
Table 3-216 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-142
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Example
is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed, and the returned
RESET BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.76 RESET MATE BOARD

Function
Reset Mate Board
Command
RESET MATE BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
Input Parameters
Table 3-217 shows the input parameters of RESET MATE BOARD.
Table 3-217 RESET MATE BOARD Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-218 shows the output parameters of RESET MATE BOARD.
3-143
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-218 RESET MATE BOARD Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
Table 3-219 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
RESET MATE BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.77 RESET HARDWARE

Function
The hard reset function is applicable to RRU boards. It is different from the power-off &
reset function as it resets boards through underlying logic.
Power-off & reset: The whole board is powered off, and then powered on to restart.
3-144
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Hard reset: The board is not powered off, but reset from the hardware layer.
When the RRU fault at this level does not affect the running status of the RRU at the lower
level, this command can be used to reset RRU boards at this level.
After the command is executed successfully, the boards are reset and the RRU at the
lower level is not affected.
Effect on the system: Only the RRU at this level is affected, and the RRU at the lower level
is not affected.
Syntax
RESET HARDWARE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET HARDWARE command, refer to
Table 3-220.
Table 3-220 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET HARDWARE Command
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Description
Type
Integer
Range
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
0~99999
9999
RACK
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET HARDWARE command, refer to
Table 3-221.
Table 3-221 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET HARDWARE Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Character
eter
1
RESULT
3-145
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Character
eter
2
DETAIL

displays ---.
Table 3-222 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to hard reset the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0,
rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed
successfully, and queried information is returned, in which the operation result is
Successful.
RESET HARDWARE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-146
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.78 ALLOW WRITE

Function
This command opens the writing switch of the Flash. This command is used when alarm
or register information requires to be collected for fault analysis.
After the command is executed successfully, the information required by the alarm analysis
is written into the FLASH of each board. If the command is not disabled, the information is
collected every half hour. To disable the writing switch of the Flash, you can execute the
NOT ALLOW WRITE command.
Impact on the system: After the command is executed, the information is collected every
half hour, which does not affect the system services.
Syntax
ALLOW WRITE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the ALLOW WRITE command, refer to Table
3-223.
Table 3-223 ALLOW WRITE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
0~999999
None
Required
None
Required
Required
eter
1
SUB-
Inte-
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~999999
ger
999
Enum
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the ALLOW WRITE command, refer to Table
3-224.
Table 3-224 ALLOW WRITE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
3-147
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-225 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to allow alarms to be written into the Flash on the NE
with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the command is executed successfully, the returned result
is Successful.
ALLOW WRITE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.79 NOT ALLOW WRITE

Function
This command disables the writing switch of the Flash.
This command is used when the information collection for alarm analysis are not required.
After the command is executed successfully, alarm information is not written into the Flash
of each board.
Syntax
NOT ALLOW WRITE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-148
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the NOT ALLOW WRITE command, refer to
Table 3-226.
Table 3-226 NOT ALLOW WRITE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
ID
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Required
999
3
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the NOT ALLOW WRITE command, refer to
Table 3-227.
Table 3-227 NOT ALLOW WRITE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-228 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-149
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to perform the operation that alarms are not allowed
to be written into the Flash on the NE with subnet ID 0 and NE ID 0. If the command is
executed successfully, the returned result is Successful.
NOT ALLOW WRITE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.80 BLOCK BOARD

Function
This command blocks a baseband board. After the board is blocked, all services on the
board are interrupted.
To stop the services controlled by the baseband board, use this command. To start the
services controlled by the baseband board, use the UNBLOCK BOARD command.
After the command is executed successfully, the baseband board is blocked, and services
are interrupted.
Effect on the system: The cell services born on the baseband board become invalid.
Syntax
BLOCK BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF
>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the BLOCK BOARD command, refer to Table
3-229.
Table 3-229 Input Parameter Descriptions for the BLOCK BOARD Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUBNET
Integer
configurations
2
NE
NE ID in operation
0~99999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
0~99999
9999
3-150
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
RACK
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Required
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the BLOCK BOARD command, refer to Table
3-230.
Table 3-230 Output Parameter Descriptions for the BLOCK BOARD Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

---.
Table 3-231 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to block the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number
3-151
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
BLOCK BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.81 UNBLOCK BOARD

Function
This command unblocks a baseband board. The board recovers to normal status after it
is unblocked.
To start the services controlled by the baseband board, use this command.
After the command is executed successfully, the board is unblocked and recovers to
normal status.
Effect on the system: The cell services born on the baseband board can be used.
Syntax
UNBLOCK BOARD:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHEL
F>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the UNBLOCK BOARD command, refer to
Table 3-232.
Table 3-232 Input Parameter Descriptions for the UNBLOCK BOARD Command
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
ter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
configurations
3
RACK
Rack number of the
999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
board
4
SHEL-
Shelf number of the
board
3-152
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
ter
5
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RA-
Radio
Enum
Required
DIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the UNBLOCK BOARD command, refer to
Table 3-233.
Table 3-233 Output Parameter Descriptions for the UNBLOCK BOARD Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Charac-
ter
1
RESULT
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter

---.
Table 3-234 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to unblock the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number
queried information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful.
UNBLOCK BOARD:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
3-153
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)

1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.82 BLOCK RRU

Function
Block RRU channel
Command
BLOCK RRU:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
T=<SLOT>,ANTNO=<ANTNO>,SUPPEND=<SUPPEND>,ANTSUPP=<ANTSUPP>,RAD
IO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-235 shows the input parameters of BLOCK RRU.
Table 3-235 BLOCK RRU Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
ANTNO
Ant No.
INT
1~255
Required
SUP-
Suppend
INT
1~214740
Required
PEND
No.
ANTS-
Ant and
Required
UPP
Sup-
Required
0000
STRING
1~214740
0000
pend(Ant
:Suppend)
9
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
3-154
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
Table 3-236 shows the output parameters of BLOCK RRU.
Table 3-236 BLOCK RRU Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Failure Reason
Table 3-237 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to block RRU, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU rack number is
51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is 1, and antenna number is 1. The command
is executed, and the operation result is Successful.
BLOCK RRU:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,ANTNO=1,SUPPEND=1,A
NTSUPP="1",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-155
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.83 UNBLOCK RRU

Function
Unblock RRU channel
Command
UNBLOCK RRU:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,ANTNO=<ANTNO>,SUPPEND=<SUPPEND>,ANTSUPP=<ANTSUPP>,RAD
IO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-238 shows the input parameters of UNBLOCK RRU.
Table 3-238 UNBLOCK RRU Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
ANTNO
Ant No.
INT
1~255
Required
SUP-
Suppend
INT
1~214740
Required
PEND
No.
ANTS-
Ant and
Required
UPP
Sup-
Required
0000
STRING
1~214740
0000
pend(Ant
:Suppend)
9
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Output Parameters
Table 3-239 shows the output parameters of UNBLOCK RRU.
Table 3-239 UNBLOCK RRU Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
3-156
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-240 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to unblock RRU, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU rack
number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is 1, and antenna number is 1.
The command is executed, and the operation result is Successful.
UNBLOCK RRU:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,ANTNO=1,SUPPEND
=1,ANTSUPP="1",RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.84 BLOCK BOARD RADIO

Function
Block board radio
Command
BLOCK BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SH
ELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-241 shows the input parameters of BLOCK BOARD RADIO.
3-157
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-241 BLOCK BOARD RADIO Input Parameters

No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-242 shows the output parameters of BLOCK BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-242 BLOCK BOARD RADIO Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
Table 3-243 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to block the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number
BLOCK BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
3-158
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)

1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.85 UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO

Function
Unblock board radio
Command
UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF
=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
Table 3-244 shows the input parameters of UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-244 UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-245 shows the output parameters of UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO.
Table 3-245 UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
3-159
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-246 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
Execute the command to unblock the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number
UNBLOCK BOARD RADIO:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=AL
L;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.86 POWER ON
Function
This command powers on a board after it is powered off by the POWER OFF command.
After the POWER OFF command is executed, execute this command to power on the
board. The board that is powered off can also be powered on by resetting the CC board
or eNodeB.
After this command is executed successfully, the board is powered on.
Effect on the system: The board is powered on and recovers to normal status.
3-160
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
POWER ON:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
T=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the POWER ON command, refer to Table
3-247.
Table 3-247 Input Parameter Descriptions for the POWER ON Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RACK
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
None
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
quired
0~99999
None
9999
Integer
Re-
quired
1~255
None
Re-
quired
4
SHELF
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
5
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Re-
quired
6
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the POWER ON command, refer to Table
3-248.
Table 3-248 Output Parameter Descriptions for the POWER ON Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
Character
Character
ter
1
RESULT
DETAIL

displays ---.
3-161
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-249 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to power on the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack
number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed
successfully, and queried information is returned, in which the operation result is
Successful.
POWER ON:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.87 POWER OFF

Function
This command powers off a board that is being powered. The command is applicable to
all BBU boards except for the CC, PM, UES, SA, FCE, and FAB boards.
To stop running a board, use this command.
After this command is executed successfully, the board is powered off. To power on the
board, execute the POWER ON command, or reset the CC board or eNodeB.
Effect on the system: After the board is powered off, services on the board are interrupted.
Syntax
POWER OFF:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-162
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the POWER OFF command, refer to Table
3-250.
Table 3-250 Input Parameter Descriptions for the POWER OFF Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RACK
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the POWER OFF command, refer to Table
3-251.
Table 3-251 Output Parameter Descriptions for the POWER OFF Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

---.
Table 3-252 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
3-163
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to power off the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack
number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed
successfully, and information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful.
POWER OFF:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.88 RESET POWER OFF

Function
This command powers off and resets a board. The board is reset by powering it off and
then powering it on. The active CC and FCE boards do not support this command.
When a board cannot work properly, this command can be used.
After this command is executed successfully, the board is powered off and reset. If the
command is executed unsuccessfully, the prompt Failed to execute the command is
displayed on the network management interface.
Effect on the system: If BBU boards are powered off, services will be interrupted. If RRU
boards are powered off, the cascading RRU at lower level will be affected, and services
on the RRUs of this level and lower level will be interrupted.
Syntax
RESET POWER OFF:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET POWER OFF command, refer to
Table 3-253.
3-164
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-253 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET POWER OFF Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RACK
Rack number of the
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Enum
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Slot number of the

board
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET POWER OFF command, refer
to Table 3-254.
Table 3-254 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET POWER OFF Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

displays ---.
Table 3-255 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
3-165
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to power off and reset the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is
0, rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 6. The command is executed
RESET POWER OFF:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=6,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.89 SHOW PM
Function
This command queries the power supply relationship between boards in the BBU shelf,
that is, the PM board provides power to which boards. The CC, SA, and FA boards are
powered by the shelf and they are not included in the power supply relationship table.
Before executing the command, verify that there is no alarm about parameter configuration
error (sub-code: the power needed for the board exceeds the power supply capability of
the PM) in the network management system.
l
l
When the board is not powered, check whether it is in the power supply relationship
table. If not, it cannot be powered.
When two PM boards are configured, which work in load sharing mode, pull out one
PM board and observe which boards are powered off.
After the command is executed successfully, the power supply relationship is displayed in
the network management system, which shows the relationship between one PM board
and the boards powered by the PM board.
Syntax
SHOW PM:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT
=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-166
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW PM command, refer to Table 3-256.
Table 3-256 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW PM Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
RACK
Rack number of the
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
configurations
3
Default
9999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Enum
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Slot number of the

board
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW PM command, refer to Table
3-257.
Table 3-257 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW PM Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter

---.
3
SUPPLY-
Describes the power supply object.
INFO
Charac-
ter
Table 3-258 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
3-167
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to query the power supply relationship of the PM board, whose
subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 15.
The command is executed successfully, and queried information is returned, in which the
operation result is Successful, and power supply object is BPL (1, 1, 6).
SHOW PM:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=15,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |SUPPLYINFO
1 Successful BPL(1.1.6)
Rows: 1
3.1.90 RESET FCE

Function
This command resets the smoke sensor in the cabinet.
When a smoke sensor is configured in the cabinet, and an alarm about smoke is raised,
this command can be used to clear the alarm.
After the command is executed successfully, the smoke sensor is reset, and the alarm is
cleared.
Syntax
RESET FCE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
3-168
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the RESET FCE command, refer to Table
3-259.
Table 3-259 Input Parameter Descriptions for the RESET FCE Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
RACK
Rack number of the
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
Integer
0~999999
None
Required
configurations
3
Default
999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Enum
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Slot number of the

board
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the RESET FCE command, refer to Table
3-260.
Table 3-260 Output Parameter Descriptions for the RESET FCE Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

---.
Table 3-261 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-169
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to reset the smoke sensor of the FCE board, whose subnet ID is
0, NE ID is 0, rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 8. The command is
executed successfully, and queried information is returned, in which the operation result
is Successful.
RESET FCE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=8,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.91 CLEAN DISK

Function
This command cleans redundant or obsolete files from the flash disk to release disk space
for key file, for example version files or black box.
When the system detects the free space is small, or an alarm about insufficient disk space
is raised (the free space is less than 5 M), this command can be used to release some
disk space.
Select the file types (log files, temporary files, other files, backup files) and execute the
command to delete corresponding files.
Syntax
CLEAN DISK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,FILETYPE=<FILETYPE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-170
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CLEAN DISK command, refer to Table
3-262.
Table 3-262 Input Parameter Descriptions for the CLEAN DISK Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
RACK
Integer
0~99999
SHELF
Rack number of the
Integer
0~99999
SLOT
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
Required
9999
Shelf number of the
Integer
0~99999
board
5
Instance
9999
board
4
Optional
configurations
3
Default
9999
Integer
0~99999
9999
FILE-
File type
TYPE
Enumer-
Refer
ated type
to Table
3-264
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CLEAN DISK command, refer to Table
3-263.
Table 3-263 Output Parameter Descriptions for the CLEAN DISK Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the File Type parameter, refer to Table 3-264.
Table 3-264 File Type
Macro Name
Description
TEMP
Temporary files
3-171
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro Name
Description
BACK
Backup files
OTHER
Other files
LOG
Log files

Table 3-265 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to clean temporary files from the board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID
is 0, rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 1. The command is executed
CLEAN DISK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,FILETYPE=TEMP,RADIO
=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.92 QUERY DISK

Function
Query Disk Space
3-172
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Command
QUERY DISK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
Input Parameters
Table 3-266 shows the input parameters of QUERY DISK.
Table 3-266 QUERY DISK Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUM
Required
Output Parameters
Table 3-267 shows the output parameters of QUERY DISK.
Table 3-267 QUERY DISK Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Fail Reason
FREE
STRING
Free Flash(KB)
TOTAL
STRING
Total Flash(KB)
ALLOCATED
STRING
Flash Capacity
Allocated(KB)
6
RATE
STRING
Rate of Free
Flash(%)
7
USAGE
STRING
Flash Usage(%)
Table 3-268 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
3-173
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to block the RRU (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 1, rack number
= 53, shelf number = 1, slot number =1, antenna No. = 1, and frequency band = 1). If the
QUERY DISK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=53,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason |Free Flash(KB) |Total Flash(KB) |Flash Capacity
Allocated(KB) |Rate of Free Flash(%) |Flash Usage(%)
1 Successful 100 1000 200 80 20
Rows: 1
3.1.93 PA ON NEW
Function
This command turns on the PA of an RRU. By default the PA is turned on after upgrade.
To turn on the PA after it is turned off, use this command.
If an RRU board is replaced on the same optical interface, and the PA function is turned
off for the RRU board, to turn on the PA function, this command needs to be executed.
The PA is turned on for the RRU board after the command is executed.
Effect on the system: The PA is turned on for the RRU board, and services on the RRU
board can be used.
Syntax
PA ON NEW:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLO
3-174
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the PA ON NEW command, refer to Table
3-269.
Table 3-269 Input Parameter Descriptions for the PA ON NEW Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
Inte-
0~99999
NET
configurations
ger
NE
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
board
ger
Inte-
1~255
None
Required
Required
SHELF
Optional
SUB-
RACK
Default
SLOT
ger
6
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the PA ON NEW command, refer to Table
3-270.
Table 3-270 Output Parameter Descriptions for the PA ON NEW Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter
Table 3-271 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
3-175
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to turn on the PA for the RRU board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE
ID is 0, RRU rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, and RRU slot number is 1. The
command is executed successfully, and information is returned, in which the operation
PA ON NEW:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.94 PA OFF NEW

Function
This command turns off the PA of an RRU. After the PA is turned off, the RRU cannot
transmit power and services are interrupted.
When an RRU is faulty and needs repairing, or a PA is not needed, this command can be
used. To turn on the PA, use the PA ON NEW command.
After the command is executed successfully, the PA is turned off, and an alarm about PA
OFF is raised.
Effect on the system: When the PA of an RRU is turned off, the RRU cannot transmit
power, and services are interrupted.
Syntax
PA OFF NEW:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
OT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-176
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the PA OFF NEW command, refer to Table
3-272.
Table 3-272 Input Parameter Descriptions for the PA OFF NEW Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
RACK
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
configurations
3
Default
9999
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the PA OFF NEW command, refer to Table
3-273.
Table 3-273 Output Parameter Descriptions for the PA OFF NEW Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

---.
Table 3-274 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
3-177
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to turn off the PA for the RRU board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE
ID is 0, RRU rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, and RRU slot number is 1. The
command is executed successfully, and information is returned, in which the operation
PA OFF NEW:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.95 SHOW CARRIER NEW

Function
This command queries the total power of a channel, or total power + carrier power of an
RRU.
Note: This function is only applicable to CDMA.
To check whether there is power output on an RRU channel, use this command.
After the command is executed successfully, the total power of the RRU channel, or total
power + carrier power is displayed on the network management interface.
Syntax
SHOW CARRIER NEW:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SH
ELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-178
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW CARRIER NEW command, refer
to Table 3-275.
Table 3-275 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW CARRIER NEW Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~99999
RACK
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
configurations
3
Default
9999
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Integer
1~255
None
Required
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW CARRIER NEW command, refer
to Table 3-276.
Table 3-276 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW CARRIER NEW Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
DETAIL
Charac-
ter

3
QRE-
SULT
Charac-
ter
Table 3-277 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-179
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to query carrier power of the RRU board, whose subnet ID is 0,
NE ID is 0, RRU rack number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, and RRU slot number is 1.
The command is executed successfully, and information is returned, in which the operation
SHOW CARRIER NEW:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result| Failure Reason |QRESULT
1 Successful AntNo:1 TotalPower:No Power
2 Successful AntNo:3 TotalPower:No Power
Rows: 2
3.1.96 CAPTURE UES

Function
This command captures packets from the source port to the destination port for fault
analysis. The destination port must be an idle port. Otherwise, packet capturing may
affect the transmission, for example service packet loss and link breakdown.
To locate the fault of a switching module, or analyze packets of a specific port, use this
command.
After the command is executed successfully, all packets passing through the source port
can be captured on the destination port.
Effect on the system: If the destination port is idle, there is no effect on the system.
Syntax
CAPTURE UES:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,S
LOT=<SLOT>,KEYONE=<KEYONE>,KEYTWO=<KEYTWO>,KEYTHREE=<KEYTH
REE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-180
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the CAPTURE UES command, refer to Table
3-278.
Table 3-278 Input Parameter Descriptions for the CAPTURE UES Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
RACK
Rack number of the
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
configurations
3
0~99999
Default
0~99999
9999
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
None
None
Required
None
None
Required
None
None
Required
Required
board
4
SHELF
Shelf number of the

board
SLOT
Slot number of the

board
KEY-
Source port of
Enumer-
ONE
mirroring entrance
ated type
KEY-
Source port of
Enumer-
TWO
mirroring exit
ated type
KEYTH-
Destination port of
Enumer-
REE
mirroring
ated type
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the CAPTURE UES command, refer to Table
3-279.
Table 3-279 Output Parameter Descriptions for the CAPTURE UES Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
Enumeration
For the enumeration information of the mirroring port types, refer to Table 3-280.
3-181
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-280 Mirroring Ports

Macro Name
Description
X1
X1 electrical interface on the front panel
X2
X3
UPLINK
UPLINK electrical interface on the front panel
X4
X4 optical interface on the front panel
FIBER
UPLINK optical interface on the front panel
CC1
CC1 interface of the SGMII interface on the

backplane
CC2
CC2 interface of the SGMII interface on the

backplane
DP
Deleting corresponding ports

Table 3-281 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to mirror packets of the UES board, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is
0, rack number is 1, shelf number is 1, and slot number is 13. The command is executed
CAPTURE UES:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13,KEYONE=X1,KEYTW
O=X1,KEYTHREE=X1,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
3-182
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Rows: 1
3.1.97 SHOW E1
Function
This command queries the E1 link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports E1/T1 self-loop alarms.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the E1 link status (normal
or failed).
Syntax
SHOW E1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,E1DEVICE=<E1DEVICE>,RADIO=<RADI
O>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW E1 command, refer to Table 3-282.
Table 3-282 SHOW E1 Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
Range
eter
1
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Inte-
1~16
None
Required
Required
E1DE-
E1 ID
VICE
4
Default
RADIO
ger
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW E1 command, refer to Table 3-283.
Table 3-283 SHOW E1 Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

3
ADMIN
3-183
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-284 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the E1 link status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, and E1 ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
SHOW E1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,E1DEVICE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.98 SHOW T1
Function
This command queries the T1 link status.
This command applies when the OMM reports E1/T1 self-loop alarms.
After the command is successfully executed, the system shows the T1 link status (normal
or failed).
Syntax
SHOW T1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,T1DEVICE=<T1DEVICE>,RADIO=<RADI
O>;
3-184
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW T1 command, refer to Table 3-285.
Table 3-285 SHOW T1 Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Range
Integer
0~99999
ID
2
NE
Operated NE ID
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
9
Integer
0~99999
9999
T1DE-
T1 ID
Integer
1~16
None
Required
Radio
Enum
Required
VICE
4
RADIO
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW T1 command, refer to Table 3-286.
Table 3-286 SHOW T1 Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
ADMIN
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter
Charac-
ter
Table 3-287 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-185
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to query the T1 link status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, and T1 ID = 0).The result is shown as follows:
SHOW T1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,T1DEVICE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.99 BLOCK E1
Function
This command blocks an E1 link. After the command is successfully executed, the system
shows the E1 link status (successful or failed).
Command
BLOCK E1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,E1DEVICE=<E1DEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO
>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of BLOCK E1, refer to Table 3-288.
Table 3-288 BLOCK E1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
Required
7295
3
E1DE-
Object ID
VICE
of E1
RADIO
Radio
INT
0~429496
7295
ENUME
3-186
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
5
RACK
Rack
Instance
Count
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of BLOCK E1, refer to Table 3-289.
Table 3-289 BLOCK E1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
For a description of Radio Enumerate Type, refer to Table 3-290.
Table 3-290 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
3-187
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Note:
The command is not applicable to the LTE_FDD and LTE_TDD.
Example
The following example shows how to block a control link of the board (subnet ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13).
BLOCK E1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,E1DEVICE=1,RADIO=CDMA,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT
=13;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.100 UNBLOCK E1
Function
This command unblocks an E1 link. After the command is successfully executed, the
system shows the E1 link status (successful or failed).
Command
UNBLOCK E1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,E1DEVICE=<E1DEVICE>,RADIO=<RAD
IO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of UNBLOCK E1, refer to Table 3-291.
Table 3-291 UNBLOCK E1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
7295
3-188
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
3
Instance
Count
E1DE-
Object ID
INT
VICE
of E1
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
RACK
Rack
0~429496
Required
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
7295
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of UNBLOCK E1, refer to Table 3-292.
Table 3-292 UNBLOCK E1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
Table 3-293 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
3-189
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
ALL
ALL
Note:
The UNBLOCK E1 command is not applicable to the LTE_FDD and LTE_TDD.
Example
The following example shows how to block a control link of the board (subnet ID = 0, NE
ID = 0, rack number = 1, shelf number = 1, and slot number =13).
UNBLOCK E1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,E1DEVICE=0,RADIO=CDMA,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLO
T=13;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.101 SHOW STM1

Function
Query Stm1 Link
Command
SHOW STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,STM1DEVICE=<STM1DEVICE>,RADIO
=<RADIO>
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of SHOW STM1, refer to Table 3-294.
Table 3-294 SHOW STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
7295
3-190
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
3
STM1DE-
Object ID
VICE
of STM-1
RADIO
Radio
Instance
Count
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
7295
ENUME
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW STM1, refer to Table 3-295.
Table 3-295 SHOW STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
ADMIN
Administrative
STRING
STRING
Status
4
BLOCKSTAT
Block(or Unblock)
Status
Enumerate
Table 3-296 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD
LTE FDD
LTE_TDD
LTE TDD
Note:
The SHOW STM1 command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
SHOW STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,STM1DEVICE=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA;
3-191
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.102 BLOCK STM1

Function
This command blocks a specified STM-1 link. After the product finds that the link is blocked,
it does not allocate services to this link.
Command
BLOCK STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,STM1DEVICE=<STM1DEVICE>,RADIO
=<RADIO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of BLOCK STM1, refer to Table 3-297.
Table 3-297 BLOCK STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
7295
3
STM1DE-
Object ID
INT
0~429496
VICE
of STM-1
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
RACK
Rack
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
7295
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of BLOCK STM1, refer to Table 3-298.
3-192
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-298 BLOCK STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
Table 3-299 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Note:
The command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
The following example shows how to block the link (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and STM-1 ID = 1). The command is executed successfully, and the returned result is
Successful.
BLOCK STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,STM1DEVICE=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA,RACK=1,SHE
LF=1,SLOT=13;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-193
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.103 UNBLOCK STM1

Function
This command unblocks a specified STM-1 link.
successfully, the blocked STM-1 recovers.
After this command is executed
Command
UNBLOCK STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,STM1DEVICE=<STM1DEVICE>,RAD
IO=<RADIO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of UNBLOCK STM1, refer to Table 3-300.
Table 3-300 UNBLOCK STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
7295
3
STM1DE-
Object ID
INT
0~429496
VICE
of STM-1
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
RACK
Rack
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
7295
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of UNBLOCK STM1, refer to Table 3-301.
3-194
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-301 UNBLOCK STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
Table 3-302 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Note:
The UNBLOCK STM1 command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
The following example shows how to block the link (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and STM-1 ID = 1). The command is executed successfully, and the returned result is
Successful.
UNBLOCK STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,STM1DEVICE=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA,RACK=1,S
HELF=1,SLOT=1;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-195
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.104 BLOCK CHANNEL STM1

Function
This command blocks a specified channel STM-1 link. After the product finds that the link
is blocked, it does not allocate services to this link.
Command
BLOCK CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,CHNSTM=<CHNSTM>,RADI
O=<RADIO>
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of BLOCK CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table 3-303.
Table 3-303 BLOCK CHANNEL STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
Required
7295
3
CHNSTM
Object ID
INT
of chan-
0~429496
7295
nelized
STM-1
4
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of BLOCK CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table 3-304.
Table 3-304 BLOCK CHANNEL STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
Table 3-305 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
3-196
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Note:
The command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
The following example shows how to block link (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0, and Channel
STM-1 ID = 1). The query is successful, the returned result is Successful.
BLOCK CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,CHNSTM=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.105 UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1

Function
This command unblocks a specified channel STM-1 link. After the link is unblocked, its
normal operation is recovered.
Command
UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,CHNSTM=<CHNSTM>,R
ADIO=<RADIO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table 3-306.
3-197
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-306 UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS

No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
7295
3
CHNSTM
Object ID
INT
of chan-
0~429496
7295
nelized
STM-1
4
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
RACK
Rack
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table
3-307.
Table 3-307 UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
Enumerate
3-198
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-308 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Note:
The UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1 command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
The following example shows how to unblock a link (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0, and
channel STM-1 ID = 1). The command is executed successfully, and the returned result
is Successful.
UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,CHNSTM=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA,RAC
K=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.106 SHOW CHANNEL STM1

Function
This command queries channel STM-1 link status. Impact on the system: none.
Command
SHOW CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,CHNSTM=<CHNSTM>,RADI
O=<RADIO>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>;
3-199
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
INPUT PARAMETERS
For a description of input parameters of SHOW CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table 3-309.
Table 3-309 SHOW CHANNEL STM1 INPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~429496
Required
Required
7295
3
CHNSTM
Object ID
INT
of chan-
0~429496
7295
nelized
STM-1
4
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
RACK
Rack
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
Integer
1~255
None
Required
number
of the
operated
board
6
SHELF
Shelf
number
of the
operated
board
SLOT
Slot
number
of the
operated
board
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW CHANNEL STM1, refer to Table 3-310 .
Table 3-310 SHOW CHANNEL STM1 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Failure Reason
STRING
ADMIN
Administrative
STRING
STRING
Status
4
BLOCKSTAT
Block(or Unblock)
Status
3-200
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Enumerate
Table 3-311 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Note:
The SHOW CHANNEL STM1 command is applicable to the TD-SCDMA mode only.
Example
The following example shows how to query link status (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0,
and STM-1 ID = 1). The query is successful, the returned result is Successful, and the
operational status is Normal.
SHOW CHANNEL STM1:SUBNET=0,NE=0,CHNSTM=0,RADIO=TD_SCDMA,RACK
=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=13
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Administrative Status | Block(or Unblock) Status
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.1.107 SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE

Function
This command queries the notch filter type. A notch filter is a CDMA auxiliary device for an
antenna. It is used to effectively suppress unwanted frequency information in input signals
provided that other frequency signals are not lost. To query the type of the current notch
3-201
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
filter and determine whether it meets the requirements of the cell, use this command. After
this command is executed successfully, the type of the current notch filter is displayed.
Command
SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF
=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE, refer to Table 3-312.
Table 3-312 SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE, refer to Table
3-313.
Table 3-313 SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
TYPE
Wave Trap Type
STRING
3-202
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-314 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to query the type of the notch filter (subnet ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, rack number = 51, shelf number = 1, and slot number =1). The operation is successful,
the returned result is Successful, and the notch filter type is 1.
SHOW NOTCHFILTER TYPE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDE
VICE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Wave Trap Type
1 Successful 1
Rows: 1
3.1.108 SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS

Function
This command queries the notch filter status. A notch filter is a CDMA auxiliary device for
an antenna. It is used to effectively suppress unwanted frequency information in input
signals provided that other frequency signals are not lost. To query the status of the
current notch filter and determine whether it meets the requirements of the cell, use this
command. After this command is executed successfully, the status of the current notch
filter is displayed. Impact on the system: none.
Command
SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHE
LF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
3-203
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS, refer to Table
3-315.
Table 3-315 SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS, refer to Table
3-316.
Table 3-316 SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
STATUS
Wave Trap Switch
STRING
Status
Table 3-317 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)

3-204
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to query the status of the notch filter (sub-network ID
= 0, NE ID = 0, rack number = 51, shelf number = 1, slot number = 1, and AISG device
ID =1). The query is successful, the returned result is Successful, and the on-off status of
the notch filter is On.
SHOW NOTCHFILTER STATUS:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISG
DEVICE=0,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Wave Trap Switch Status
1 Successful On
Rows: 1
3.1.109 SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN

Function
This command enables a notch filter, and makes it operate properly. A notch filter is
a CDMA auxiliary device for an antenna. It is used to effectively suppress unwanted
frequency information in input signals provided that other frequency signals are not lost.
To suppress unwanted frequency information in input signals, use this command to enable
the notch filter. If this command is executed successfully, the notch filter operates properly.
Failure means that the command execution has failed due to a specific cause, which is
indicated by DETAIL.
Impact on the system: Suppressing unwanted frequency information in input signals can
improve call quality.
Command
SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN, refer to Table 3-318.
3-205
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-318 SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN Input Parameters

No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
AISGDE-
Object ID
INT
1~12
Required
VICE
of AISG
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN, refer to Table 3-319.
Table 3-319 SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
Table 3-320 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to enable the notch filter (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, rack number = 51, shelf number = 1, slot number = 1, and AISG device ID =1). The
setting is successful, and the returned result Successful.
3-206
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
SET NOTCHFILTER OPEN:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVI

CE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.110 SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE

Function
This command turns off the switch for the notch filter to disable it. A notch filter is a CDMA
auxiliary device for an antenna. It is used to effectively suppress unwanted frequency
information in input signals provided that other frequency signals are not lost.
When it is not required to suppress unwanted frequency information in input signals, use
this command to disable the notch filter. If this command is executed successfully, the
notch filter stops operation. Failure means that the command execution has failed due to
a specific cause, which is indicated by DETAIL.
Impact on the system: Stopping the suppression of unwanted frequency information in
input signals may affect call quality.
Command
SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE, refer to Table 3-321.
Table 3-321 SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
3-207
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
6
AISGDE-
Object ID
VICE
of AISG
Instance
Count
INT
1~12
Required
ENUME
Required
device
7
RADIO
Radio
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE, refer to Table
3-322.
Table 3-322 SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
Table 3-323 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to disable the notch filter (sub-network ID = 0, NE ID
= 0, rack number = 51, shelf number = 1, slot number = 1, and AISG device ID =1). The
setting is successful, and the returned result Successful.
SET NOTCHFILTER CLOSE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVI
CE=0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
3-208
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Rows: 1
3.1.111 SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA

Function
This command sets data stored in the notch filter of the V2.0 protocol in batches, which
mechanical tilt, notch filter type, notch filter serial number, and notch filter type.
replacement, use this command. The data stored in the notch filter of the V2.0. protocol
is set in batches after the command is executed successfully. If the command is executed
unsuccessfully, the failure cause is displayed.
Command
SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SH
ELF=<SHELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>[,INSTALLATION_DATE
=<INSTALLATION_DATE>][,INSTALLATION_ID=<INSTALLATION_ID>][,BASE_STATIO
N_ID=<BASE_STATION_ID>][,SECTOR_ID=<SECTOR_ID>][,BEARING=<BEARING>][,M
ECHANICAL_TILT=<MECHANICAL_TILT>][,MODEL_NUMBER=<MODEL_NUMBER
>][,SERIAL_NUMBER=<SERIAL_NUMBER>][,FREQUENCY_BAND=<FREQUENCY_BA
ND>][,BEAMWIDTH=<BEAMWIDTH>][,GAIN=<GAIN>][,BAND_CLASS_INFO=<BAND_
CLASS_INFO>][,BANDWIDTH_INFO=<BANDWIDTH_INFO>][,VERSION_INFO=<VERSI
ON_INFO>],RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA, refer to Table
3-324.
Table 3-324 SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
3-209
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
6
AISGDE-
Object ID
VICE
of AISG
Instance
Count
INT
1~12
Required
STRING
0~9999
ANY
device
7
INSTAL-
Installa-
LATION_
tion date
OPTION
DATE
8
INSTAL-
Installer's
LA-
ID
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
TION_ID
9
BASE-
NE ID
STRING
0~9999
_STA-
ANY
OPTION
TION_ID
10
SEC-
Sector ID
STRING
0~9999
TOR_ID
11
BEARING
OPTION
Antenna
STRING
0~9999
bearing
12
ANY
ME-
Installed
CHANI-
mechani-
CAL_TILT
cal tilt(de-
ANY
OPTION
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
grees)
13
MODEL_
Antenna
NUMBER
model
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
number
14
SERIAL_
Antenna
NUMBER
serial
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
number
15
FRE-
Fre-
QUENCY-
quency
_BAND
band(M-
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
Hz)
16
BEAMWI-
Beam-
DTH
width
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
for each
band(deg)
17
GAIN
Gain for
STRING
each
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
band(dBi)
3-210
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
18
19
20
BAND_C-
Band
LASS_I-
Class In-
NFO
formation
BAND-
Band-
WIDTH_I-
width In-
NFO
formation
VERSIO-
Version
N_INFO
Informa-
Instance
Count
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
STRING
0~9999
ANY
OPTION
tion
21
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA, refer to Table
3-325.
Table 3-325 SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
DATA
AISG Device Data
STRING
Table 3-326 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
SET BAT NOTCHFILTER DATA:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISG
DEVICE=0,INSTALLATION_DATE="0",INSTALLATION_ID="0",BASE_STATION_ID
3-211
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
="0",SECTOR_ID="0",BEARING="0",MECHANICAL_TILT="0",MODEL_NUMBER="0
"[,SERIAL_NUMBER="0",FREQUENCY_BAND="0",BEAMWIDTH="0",GAIN="0",BAN
D_CLASS_INFO="0",BANDWIDTH_INFO="0",VERSION_INFO="0",RADIO=ALL;
3.1.112 SHOW BOARD MODE

Function
Query Board Mode
Command
SHOW BOARD MODE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHEL
F>,SLOT=<SLOT>,RADIO=<RADIO>
Input Parameters
For a description of input parameters of SHOW BOARD MODE, refer to Table 3-327.
Table 3-327 SHOW BOARD MODE Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf NO.
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot NO.
INT
1~255
Required
RADIO
Radio
ENUME
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of output parameters of SHOW BOARD MODE, refer to Table 3-328.
Table 3-328 SHOW BOARD MODE Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
Operation Result
STRING
DETAIL
Fail Reason
STRING
MODE
Board Mode
STRING
3-212
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-329 Radio

Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
SHOW BOARD MODE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,RADIO=LTE_TD
D;
No. |Operation Result |Fail Reason |Board Mode
1 Successful Using
Row(s): 1
3.1.113 SHOW GAIN

Function
This command queries the current TMA gain and checks the effect on receiving signal
power.
This command applies when you want to query the current TMA gain and check whether
the TMA meets the cell requirements.
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the current TMA gain.
Syntax
SHOW GAIN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SL
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW GAIN command, refer to Table
3-330.
3-213
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-330 SHOW GAIN Command Input Parameter Descriptions

N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
ID
ger
NE
Operated NE ID
Inte-
0~99999
ger
9999
Rack number of the
Inte-
board
ger
Shelf number of the
Inte-
board
ger
Inte-
RACK
SHELF
SLOT
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~255
None
Required
1~12
None
Required
Required
ger
6
AIS-
AISG device ID
GDE-
Integer
VICE
7
RADIO
Radio
Enum
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW GAIN command, refer to Table
3-331.
Table 3-331 SHOW GAIN Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
RE-
Instance
Count
Character
Character
Character
SULT
2
DETAIL

3
GAIN
Gain (dB)
Table 3-332 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
3-214
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the TMA gain of the AISG device (sub-network
SHOW
=ALL;
GAIN:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,RADIO
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Gain

1 Successful 30.00.25 dB
Rows: 1
3.1.114 SET GAIN

Function
This command adjusts antenna gain on the RRU. To adjust antenna gain on the RRU, use
this command.
Command
SET
GAIN:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT
=<SLOT>,ANTNO=<ANTNO>,SUPPEND=<SUPPEND>,ANTSUPP=<ANTSUPP>,RADIO
=<RADIO>,GAIN=<GAIN>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 3-333 shows the input parameters of SET GAIN.
Table 3-333 SET GAIN Input Parameters
No
Name
Notes
Type
Range
Default
Option
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
0~999999
Required
3-215
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Notes
Type
Range
Default
Option
Instance
Count
NE
NE ID
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
RACK
Rack
INT
1~255
Required
SHELF
Shelf
INT
1~255
Required
SLOT
Slot
INT
1~255
Required
ANTNO
Ant No.
INT
1~255
Required
SUP-
Suppend
STRING
1~214740
Required
PEND
No.
ANTS-
Ant and
Required
UPP
Sup-
Required
0~255
Required
0000
STRING
1~214740
0000
pend(Ant
:Suppend)
9
RADIO
Radio
Radio(Enum)
10
GAIN
Gain
INT
Value
Output Parameters
Table 3-334 shows the output parameters of SET GAIN.
Table 3-334 SET GAIN OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Operation Result
DETAIL
STRING
Failure Reason
DATA
STRING
Gain Adjust
Result
Table 3-335 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
3-216
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Macro
Meanings
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Example
The following example shows how to set gain (sub-network ID =0, NE ID=1, rack number
=53,shelf number=1,slot number=1,antenna ID=1,gain=20 and frequency band=34).
SET GAIN:SUBNET=0,NE=1,RACK=53,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,ANTNO=1,SUPPEND="34
",ANTSUPP="1:2600M(3GPP Band7/3GPP2 BC13)",RADIO=LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD),GAIN
="20";
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.115 SET CLOCK

Function
This command sets clock output frequency.
Syntax
SET CLOCK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,CLOCK=<CLOCK>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET CLOCK command, refer to Table
3-336.
Table 3-336 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET CLOCK Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
Subnet ID
Integer
in operation
0~999999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
quired
configurations
3-217
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
CLOCK
Clock output
0~99999999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
9
Integer
quired
0~65535
None
frequency
4
RADIO
Wireless system
Re-
quired
Enu-
None
merated
Re-
quired
type
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET CLOCK command, refer to Table
3-337.
Table 3-337 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET CLOCK Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
field shows failure details, otherwise, it

shows "--".
Table 3-338 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to set the clock (subnet ID = 0, NE ID = 0). The
command execution is successful, and the returned result is Successful.
3-218
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
SET CLOCK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,CLOCK=100M,RADIO=UMTS;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.1.116 SHOW CLOCK

Function
This command queries clock output frequency.
Syntax
SHOW CLOCK:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW CLOCK command, refer to Table
3-339.
Table 3-339 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW CLOCK Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
Integer
0~999999
De-
Op-
Inst-
fault
tional
ance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Re-
configurations
2
NE
quired
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
RADIO
0~99999999
None
Wireless system
Enu-
Re-
quired
None
merated
Re-
quired
type
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW CLOCK command, refer to Table
3-340.
Table 3-340 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW CLOCK Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Character
3-219
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
2
DETAIL
Instance
Count
Character
Character

shows "--".
3
CLOCK
Clock output frequency
Table 3-341 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
Execute the command to query the clock , whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, RRU rack
number is 51, RRU shelf number is 1, RRU slot number is 1, and AISG device ID is 1. The
command is executed, and the operation result is Successful.
SHOW CLOCK:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RADIO=UMTS;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason | Clock Output Frequency
1 Successful 100M
Rows: 1
3.1.117 SET RAS AZIMUTH

Function
This command adjusts antenna azimuth by controlling the RAS device to adjust the related
cell coverage.
3-220
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
To adjust the related cell coverage, use this command. If this command is successfully
executed, the antenna azimuth is set to the current value. If this command fails, the setting
fails due to some reasons (for details, refer to DETAIL).
Impact on the system: The related cell coverage changes.
Syntax
SET RAS AZIMUTH:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHE
LF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,AZIMUTH=<AZIMUTH>,RADI
O=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SET RAS AZIMUTH command, refer to
Table 3-342.
Table 3-342 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SET RAS AZIMUTH Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
Subnet ID
Integer
0~999999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
in operation
quired
configurations
2
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
RACK
0~99999999
None
Rack number of the
Integer
SHELF
1~255
None
SLOT
Shelf number of the
Integer
1~255
None
AISGDE-
Slot number of the
AISG device ID
Integer
1~255
None
AZIMUTH
Integer
1~12
None
RADIO
Re-
Re-
quired
Azimuth (degree)
Float
None
360.0~360.0
8
Re-
quired
VICE
7
quired
board
6
Required
board
5
quired
board
4
Re-
Wireless system
Enumerated
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
type
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SET RAS AZIMUTH command, refer to
Table 3-343.
3-221
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-343 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SET RAS AZIMUTH Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

shows "--".
Table 3-344 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to set the azimuth of the device (sub-network ID = 0,
NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU slot number = 1, and
AISG device ID =1) to 10.0. The setting is successful, and the returned result Successful.
SET RAS AZIMUTH:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=51,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE=1,A
ZIMUTH=10.0,RADIO=ALL;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-222
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.1.118 SHOW RAS AZIMUTH

Function
This command queries the antenna azimuth, and checks the cell coverage.
To check the antenna azimuth or calculate the cell coverage, use this command. After this
command is successfully executed, the system shows the current RAS azimuth value.
Syntax
SHOW RAS AZIMUTH:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SH
ELF>,SLOT=<SLOT>,AISGDEVICE=<AISGDEVICE>,RADIO=<RADIO>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW RAS AZIMUTH command, refer to
Table 3-345.
Table 3-345 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW RAS AZIMUTH Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUBNET
Subnet ID
Integer
0~999999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
in operation
quired
configurations
2
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
configurations
3
RACK
0~99999999
None
Rack number of the
Integer
1~255
SHELF
None
SLOT
Shelf number of the
Integer
1~255
None
AISGDE-
Slot number of the
AISG device ID
Integer
1~255
None
RADIO
Re-
Re-
quired
Integer
1~12
None
VICE
7
quired
board
6
Required
board
5
quired
board
4
Re-
Re-
quired
Wireless system
Enumerated
None
Re-
quired
type
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW RAS AZIMUTH command, refer
to Table 3-346.
3-223
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-346 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW RAS AZIMUTH Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character
Character

shows "--".
3
AZ-
Azimuth (degree)
IMUTH
Table 3-347 Radio
Macro
Meanings
UMTS
UMTS
GSM
GSM
TD_SCDMA
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
CDMA
LTE_FDD(GOTAFDD)
LTE FDD(GOTA FDD)
LTE_TDD(GOTATDD)
TD-LTE(GOTA TDD)
ALL
ALL
Examples
The following example shows how to query the RAS azimuth of the AISG device
(sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0, RRU rack number = 51, RRU shelf number = 1, RRU
slot number = 1, and AISG device ID =1). The query is successful, the returned result is
Successful, and the azimuth is 30.0.
SHOW RAS AZIMUTH:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=1,SHELF=1,SLOT=1,AISGDEVICE
=1,RADIO=ALL;
- System command No. |Operation Result | Failure Reason |AZIMUTH (degree)
1 Successful 30.0
Rows: 1
3-224
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.2 LTE Command

3.2.1 FDD_STARTUPCELL
Function
This command starts an LTE-FDD cell. The startup operation will establish a cell in normal
status and re-provision cell services that are disabled.
To start the current LTE-FDD cell that is shut down, use this command. For example, you
can start the current LTE-FDD cell after modifying PCI through the network management
system, or fulfilling the self-healing function of NE SON.
The result information of startup operation on the current LTE-FDD cell is returned after
the command is executed successfully.
Syntax
FDD_STARTUPCELL:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUTRAN
CELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the FDD_STARTUPCELL command, refer to
Table 3-348.
Table 3-348 Input Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_STARTUPCELLCommand
N-
Parameter
Description
Type
Range
o.
SUBNET
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99999
EUTRAN-
EUTRAN FDD cell ID in
Inte-
1~9999
CELLID
ger
NE
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the FDD_STARTUPCELL command, refer
to Table 3-349.
Table 3-349 Output Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_STARTUPCELLCommand
N-
Param-
o.
eter
RE-
Description
Type
Instance
Count
SULT
Charac-
ter
3-225
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Param-
o.
eter
DETAIL
Description
Type
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
Examples
Execute the command to start the LTE-FDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and
EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and startup information is
returned, in which the operation result is Successful.
FDD_STARTUPCELL:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.2.2 FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL
Function
This command shuts down an LTE-FDD cell. After the cell is shut down, all online UEs in
the cell will migrate, and the cell deletion flow will be started. Be cautious about shutting
down a cell.
To shut down the current LTE-FDD cell, use this command. For example, you can shut
down the current LTE-FDD cell when modifying PCI through the network management
system, or starting the self-healing function of NE SON.
The result information of shutdown operation on the current LTE-FDD cell is returned after
Syntax
FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUTRA
NCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL command, refer
to Table 3-350.
3-226
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-350 Input Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL Command

N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
Description
NE
Type
Range
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
EU-
Inte-
1~9999
TRAN-
ger
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
CELLID
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL command, refer
to Table 3-351.
Table 3-351 Output Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL Command
N-
Parame-
Description
Type
Instance Count
o.
ter
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

Examples
Execute the command to shut down the LTE-FDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is
0, and EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and information is
FDD_SHUTDOWNCELL:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.2.3 FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS
Function
This command queries the running status of an LTE-FDD cell in real time.
3-227
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
To know the running status of the current LTE-FDD cell, use this command. For example,
you can check whether the cell status is normal after the version is upgraded.
The queried LTE-FDD cell status is returned after the command is executed successfully.
The query operation has no effect on the system.
Syntax
FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUT
RANCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS command,
Table 3-352 Input Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS Command
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
Description
Typ-
Range
e
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
EUTRAN-
EUTRAN FDD cell
Inte-
1~9999
CELLID
ID in operation
ger
NE
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
configurations
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS command,
Table 3-353 Output Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS
Command
N-
Param-
o.
eter
RE-
Description
Type
Count
Charac-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
ter
Charac-
ter

3
ADMIN
Indicates the running status, for example, Normal, Shut
Charac-
down and Faulty.
ter
3-228
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
Execute the command to query the LTE-FDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and
EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and queried information is
returned, in which the operation result is Successful, and the running status of the cell is
Normal.
FDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason |Running Status
1 Successful Normal
Rows: 1
3.2.4 FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES
Function
This command queries the baseband resources used by an LTE-FDD cell in real time,
including baseband board information and antenna information of the cell.
To know the baseband resources used by the current LTE-FDD cell, the baseband board
on which the cell is established, and antennas used by the cell, use this command.
Information of the baseband resources used by the LTE-FDD cell is returned after the
command is executed successfully. The query operation has no effect on the system.
Syntax
FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES :SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUT
RANCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES command,
Table 3-354 Input Parameter Descriptions for the QUERYCELLBPRES Command
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
Description
Type
Range
Default
Op-
Instance
Value
tional or
Count
Not
1
SUBNET
NE
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
3-229
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
Description
Type
Range
Default
Op-
Instance
Value
tional or
Count
Not
3
EU-
Inte-
TRAN-
ger
1~9999
None
Re-
quired
CELLID
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES command,
Table 3-355 Output Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
RESULT
Instance
Count
Char-
acter
2
DETAIL
Char-
acter

3
BPRE-
Indicates the baseband resource ID used by the cell.
SID
4
Char-
acter
DE-
Indicates the object description of baseband resources
Char-
SCRIP-
used by the cell.
acter
TION
Examples
Execute the command to query the baseband resources used by the LTE-FDD cell,
whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is
is Successful, baseband resource ID used by the cell is 1, and object description of
baseband resources is ECellEquipmentFunction=1.
FDD_QUERYCELLBPRES :SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. |Operation Result |Failure Reason |Baseband Resource ID |Description
1 Successful 1 ECellEquipmentFunction=1
Rows: 1
3-230
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.2.5 FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Function
This command queries information of neighboring cells in real time.
To know information of neighboring cells, use this command.
The queried information of neighboring cells, that is, SCTP running status, is returned after
Syntax
FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE :SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,X2AP=<X2AP>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE command,
Table 3-356 Input Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Command
N-
Param-
o.
eter
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
configurations
ger
NE
X2AP
Description
Type
Range
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
X2AP ID
Inte-
1~9999
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
ger
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE command,
Table 3-357 Output Parameter Descriptions for the FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Command
N-
Param-
o.
eter
RE-
Description
Type
Count
Char-
SULT
2
DETAIL
Instance
acter
Char-
acter

3-231
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Param-
o.
eter
ADMIN
Description
Type
Instance
Count
Char-
down and Faulty.
acter
Examples
Execute the command to query information of neighboring cells of the cell, whose subnet
ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and X2AP ID is 1. The command is executed successfully, and queried
information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful, and running status of
neighboring cells is Normal.
FDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE :SUBNET=0,NE=0,X2AP=1;
-System commandNo. |Operation Result |Failure Reason |Running Status
1 Successful Normal
3.2.6 TDD_STARTUPCELL
Function
This command starts an LTE-TDD cell. The startup operation will establish a cell in normal
status and re-provision cell services that are disabled.
To start the current LTE-TDD cell, use this command. For example, you can start the
current LTE-TDD cell after modifying PCI through the network management system, or
fulfilling the self-healing function of NE SON.
The result information of startup operation on the current LTE-TDD cell is returned after
Syntax
TDD_STARTUPCELL:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUTRAN
CELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the TDD_STARTUPCELL command, refer to
Table 3-358.
3-232
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-358 Input Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_STARTUPCELL Command

N-
Parame-
o.
ter
Description
SUBNET
Type
Range
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~9999
configurations
ger
99999
EUTRAN-
EUTRAN TDD cell ID in
Inte-
1~9999
CELLID
ger
NE
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the TDD_STARTUPCELL command, refer
to Table 3-359.
Table 3-359 Output Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_STARTUPCELL Command
N-
Param-
o.
eter
Result
Description
Type
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
Detail
Charac-
ter
Examples
Execute the command to start the LTE-TDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and
EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and information is returned,
in which the operation result is Successful.
TDD_STARTUPCELL:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3-233
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3.2.7 TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL
Function
This command shuts down an LTE-TDD cell. After the cell is shut down, all online UEs in
the cell will migrate, and the cell deletion flow will be started. Be cautious about shutting
down a cell.
To shut down the current LTE-TDD cell, use this command. For example, you can shut
down the current LTE-TDD cell when modifying PCI through the network management
system, or starting the self-healing function of NE SON.
The result information of shutdown operation on the current LTE-TDD cell is returned after
Syntax
TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUTRA
NCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL command, refer
to Table 3-360.
Table 3-360 Input Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL Command
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Range
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
EUTRAN-
Inte-
1~9999
CELLID
ger
NE
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional or
stance
Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
Re-
quired
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL command, refer
to Table 3-361.
Table 3-361 Output Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
Result
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
3-234
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
2
Detail
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
Examples
Execute the command to shut down the LTE-TDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is
0, and EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and information is
TDD_SHUTDOWNCELL:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
1 Successful
Rows: 1
3.2.8 TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS
Function
This command queries the running status of an LTE-TDD cell in real time.
To know the running status of the current LTE-TDD cell, use this command. For example,
you can check whether the cell status is normal after the version is upgraded.
The queried LTE-TDD cell status is returned after the command is executed successfully.
Syntax
TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS :SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EU
TRANCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS command,
3-235
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-362 Input Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS Command

N- Parameo-
Description
Type
Range
ter
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
.
1
SUB-
Inte-
0~99999
NET
configurations
ger
NE
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
EU-
Inte-
1~9999
TRAN-
ger
CELLID
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS command,
Table 3-363 Output Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS
Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
Result
Instance
Count
Char-
acter
2
DETAIL
Char-
acter

3
Run-
Char-
ning
down and Faulty.
acter
Indicates the cell configuration status
Char-
Status
4
Cell
Config-
acter
uration
Status
Examples
Execute the command to query the LTE-TDD cell, whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and
EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is executed successfully, and queried information is
returned, in which the operation result is Successful, and the running status of the cell is
Normal.
TDD_QUERYCELLSTATUS :SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |Running Status |Cell Configuration Status
3-236
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
1 Successful Manual shutdown cell Cell unbarred by OMC
Rows: 1
3.2.9 TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES
Function
This command queries the baseband resources used by an LTE-TDD cell in real time,
including baseband board information and antenna information of the cell.
To know the baseband resources used by the current LTE-TDD cell, the baseband board
on which the cell is established, and antennas used by the cell, use this command.
Information of the baseband resources used by the LTE-TDD cell is returned after the
command is executed successfully.
Syntax
TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,EUTRANCELLID=<EUTR
ANCELLID>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES command,
Table 3-364 Input Parameter Descriptions for the QUERYCELLBPRES Command
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
Description
Type
Range
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
NE ID in operation
Inte-
0~99999
configurations
ger
9999
EUTRAN-
Inte-
1~9999
CELLID
ger
NE
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES command,
3-237
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 3-365 Output Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES Command

No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
1
Reslut
Instance
Count
Charac-
ter
2
Detail
Charac-
ter

3
Base-
Indicates the baseband resource ID used by the cell.
band
Charac-
ter
Resource
Configuration ID
4
Descrip-
Indicates the object description of baseband resources
Charac-
tion
used by the cell.
ter
Examples
Execute the command to query the baseband resources used by the LTE-TDD cell,
whose subnet ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and EUTRAN cell ID is 27. The command is
is Successful, baseband resource ID used by the cell is 1, and object description of
baseband resources is ECellEquipmentFunction=1.
TDD_QUERYCELLBPRES:SUBNET=0,NE=0,EUTRANCELLID=27;
- System command No. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |Baseband Resource Configuration ID |Description
1 Successful 1 ECellEquipmentFunctionTDD=1,cpId=0
Rows: 1
3.2.10 TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Function
This command queries information of neighboring cells in real time.
To know information of neighboring cells, use this command.
The queried information of neighboring cells, that is, SCTP running status, is returned after
3-238
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Syntax
TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,X2APTDD=<X2APTD
D>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE command,
Table 3-366 Input Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Command
N-
Pa-
o.
rame-
Description
Type
Range
Default
Optional
Instance
Value
or Not
Count
None
Required
None
Required
None
Required
ter
1
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
9
Integer
configurations
3
X2AP-
X2AP ID
0~99999
0~99999
9999
Integer
1~9999
TDD
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE command,
Table 3-367 Output Parameter Descriptions for the TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE
Command
No.
Param-
Description
Type
eter
1
Result
Instance
Count
Char-
acter
2
Detail
Displays detailed information of the operation. If the operation
Char-
fails, this command shows failure details. If the operation
acter
succeeds, this command displays ---.

3
Run-
Indicates the running status, for example, Normal, Shut down
Char-
ning
and Faulty.
acter
Status
Examples
Execute the command to query information of neighboring cells of the cell, whose subnet
ID is 0, NE ID is 0, and X2AP ID is 1. The command is executed successfully, and queried
information is returned, in which the operation result is Successful, and running status of
neighboring cells is Normal.
3-239
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
TDD_QUERYNEIGHBOURNE:SUBNET=0,NE=0,X2APTDD=1;
System commandNo. | Operation Result | Failure Reason |Running Status
1 Successful Normal
-
3.2.11 SHOW NE DB STATUS

Function
This command queries NE database status.
Syntax
SHOW NE DB STATUS:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>;
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the SHOW NE DB STATUS command, refer
to Table 3-368.
Table 3-368 Input Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW NE DB STATUS Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
Range
ter
SUB-
NET
configurations
NE
NE ID in operation
Integer
0~999999
De-
Op-
Instance
fault
tional
Count
Value
or Not
None
Re-
quired
Integer
configurations
0~99999999
None
Re-
quired
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the SHOW NE DB STATUS command, refer
to Table 3-369.
Table 3-369 Output Parameter Descriptions for the SHOW NE DB STATUS Command
No.
Parame-
Description
Type
ter
Instance
Count
RESULT
Character
DETAIL
Character

shows "--".
3-240
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Examples
The following example shows how to query the NE database status of the resource whose
subnet ID is 0 and NE ID is 0. The command is executed successfully, and queried
SHOW NE DB STATUS:SUBNET=0,NE=0;
1 Successful
3-241
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
3-242
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 4
Diagnose Management
Table of Contents
BOARD DIAGNOSE...................................................................................................4-1
4.1 BOARD DIAGNOSE

Function
This command diagnoses the board. Only the users with administrator rights or diagnosis
rights can execute this command.
This command applies when you want to perform the following tests:
l
l
l
l
Site test
Board test
Function test
Function test of a specified board
After this command is successfully executed, the system shows the diagnosis result of the
board.
Syntax
BOARD DIAGNOSE:[SUBNET=<SUBNET>][,NE=<NE>][,RACK=<RACK>][,SHELF=<S
HELF>][,SLOT=<SLOT>][,FUNCTION ID=<FUNCTION ID>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the BOARD DIAGNOSE command, refer to
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 BOARD DIAGNOSE Command Input Parameter Descriptions
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
SUBNET
NE
Description
Type
Operated NE ID
Range
Inte-
0~9999
ger
Inte-
0~9999
ger
99999
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
None
quired
None
Re-
quired
4-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
N-
Parame-
o.
ter
RACK
Description
Type
Inte-
Range
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
1~255
None
Optional
1~255
None
Optional
1~255
None
Optional
Inte-
No limit,
None
Optional
ger
but
ger
4
SHELF
Integer
SLOT
Integer
FUNC-
Diagnosis type ID
TION_ID
checked
by the
program
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the BOARD DIAGNOSE command, refer to
Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 BOARD DIAGNOSE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
FUNCTIONID
Diagnosis function ID
Character
FUNCTION
Diagnosis function name
Character
ELEMENTID
Test element ID
Character
ELEMENT
Test element name
Character
POSITION
Board position. Format: board name (rack number, shelf
Character
number, slot number).

6
RESULT
Normal
Character
Known errors: for example, board is not configured, and

timed out.
Unknown errors: shown as unknown
Examples
The following example shows how to diagnose the board of the NE (sub-network ID = 0,
and NE ID = 0). The result is shown as follows:
BOARD DIAGNOSE:SUBNET=0,NE=0;
- System command No. | Function ID | Function | Element ID | Element | Position | Result
4-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 4 Diagnose Management
1 16777246 AMC Board temperature query 103200 Board temperature BPL(1.1.6) 57.0
C
2 16777273 External backplane GNSS information query 99999 External backplane
GNSSinformation query CCC(1.1.1) not configured
3 16777254 Main control board information query 106007 EPLD version CCC(1.1.1) 0
4 16777234 Clock status query 101302 Current active reference source CCC(1.1.1)
Internal GNSS
Rows: 4
4-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
4-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 5
Maintance Test Tools

Table of Contents
WB_BIND...................................................................................................................5-1
WB_CMD ...................................................................................................................5-2
WB_SHOW ................................................................................................................5-3
5.1 WB_BIND
Function
White Board-Target Bind
Command
WB_BIND:SUBNET=<SUBNET>,NE=<NE>,RACK=<RACK>,SHELF=<SHELF>,SLOT
=<SLOT>[,PORT=<PORT>][,RRU=<RRU>],CHIPTYPE=<CHIPTYPE>[,CHIP=<CHIP>],P
RODUCTID=<PRODUCTID>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 5-1 shows the input parameters of WB_BIND.
Table 5-1 WB_BIND Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
SUBNET
SubNet ID
INT
Required
NE
NE ID
INT
Required
RACK
Rack No
INT
Required
SHELF
Shelf No
INT
Required
SLOT
Slot No
INT
Required
CHIP-
Chip Type
INT
255
Required
Chip No
INT
255
ANY
TYPE
9
CHIP
OPTION
10
PRO-
Product
systool
DUCTID
ID
prod-
Required
uct(Enum)
5-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Output Parameters
Table 5-2 shows the output parameters of WB_BIND.
Table 5-2 WB_BIND OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Table 5-3 describes systool product Enumerate Type.
Table 5-3 Radio
Macro
Meanings
PLAT
UMTS
GSM
TD-SCDMA
CDMA
LTE FDD
LTE TDD
Example
WB_BIND:SUBNET=0,NE=0,RACK=0,SHELF=0,SLOT=0,PORT=255,RRU=255,CHIPT
YPE=255,CHIP=255,PRODUCTID=7;
5.2 WB_CMD
Function
White Board-Command Execute
Command
WB_CMD:COMMAND=<COMMAND>;
INPUT PARAMETERS
Table 5-4 shows the input parameters of WB_CMD.
5-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 5 Maintance Test Tools
Table 5-4 WB_CMD Input Parameters

No
Name
Notes
Type
Range
Default
Option
Instance
Count
COM-
Command
STRING
1~256
Required
MAND
Output Parameters
Table 5-5 shows the output parameters of WB_CMD.
Table 5-5 WB_CMD OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Example
WB_CMD:COMMAND="1";
5.3 WB_SHOW
Function
White Board-Show Current Binding Address
Command
WB_SHOW;
Output Parameters
Table 5-6 shows the output parameters of WB_SHOW.
Table 5-6 WB_SHOW OUTPUT PARAMETERS
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Example
WB_SHOW;
5-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
5-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 6
Software Version
Management
Table of Contents
NODEB QUERYNEVERSION ....................................................................................6-1
6.1 NODEB QUERYNEVERSION

Function
This command queries an NE version.
After the command is successfully executed, the operator can find the current NE version
information in the Software Version Management window. The information includes the
running version, activated version, backup version, and operation status of each board.
The operation status of each board is not displayed on the OSS.
The status of a version package is changed to each level as follows:
Figure 6-1 The status of a version package
6-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
l
l
l
l
After pre-activation, the target version turns from a backup version to an activated
version.
After activation, the target version turns from an activated version to a running version
(the platform package and firmware package cause the NE to restart), and the NE
loads and runs this version package.
After the activation is cancelled, the target version turns from an activated version to
a backup version. At this time, this version package can be deleted.
After upgrade, the running version turns to a backup version. At this time, this version
package can be deleted.

Usage Guidelines: The operator should have rights to query the software version.
Syntax
NODEB QUERYNEVERSION:[NELIST=<NELIST>][,FILENAME=<FILENAME>];
Input Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the NODEB QUERYNEVERSION command,
refer to Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 NODEB QUERYNEVERSION Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Pa-
Description
Type
Range
rame-
Default
Op-
In-
Value
tional
stance
or Not
Count
Re-
ter
1
NEL-
1. NE list (object NE MOI).
Char-
0~2147
IST
Format: SubNetwork=0,NE=0.
acter
400000
None
quired
2. Multiple NEs can be selected, and they are connected

by #$%. Format: SubNetwork=0,NE=0#$%SubNetwork=0,NE=1.
2
FILE-
1. It indicates the path where the
Char-
0~2147
NAME
returned information is located.
acter
400000
None
Re-
quired
The path may direct to other

machines as long as there is an
available FTP service.
2. Format: ftp://user name :password@IP port/path/file name.xml.
For example, ftp://sdrmgrson:son123@10.94.207.78:21111
/234/queryNEVersionResult.xml
3. Only FTP is supported. The
FTP format is checked before this
command is executed.
6-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 6 Software Version Management
Output Parameters
For a description of the input parameters of the NODEB QUERYNEVERSION command,
refer to Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 NODEB QUERYNEVERSION Command Input Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Description
Type
Instance
Count
RESULT
Operation result, which may be 0 (successful), 1 (failed),
Charac-
or 2 (partially successful).
ter
FAIL-
Failed NE list (failed NE MOI). Format:
Charac-
NELIST
SubNetwork=0,NE=0.Multiple NEs can be
ter
selected, they are separated by #$%. Format:

SubNetwork=0,NE=0#$%SubNetwork=0,NE=1.
3
DETAIL
Detailed operation results, which are displayed based
Charac-
on actual situations. If the operation fails, the system
ter
displays detailed failure causes.The failure causes of

different NEs are separated by #$%.
Examples
The following example shows how to check two NEs.
Target NE: sub-network ID = 0, NE ID = 0, and sub-network ID = 1, NE ID =1.
The generated file (.xml) is stored in /software version management/query on the FTP
server. The FTP user name is sdrmgrson, the password is son123, the IP address is
10.94.207.78, and the port number is 21111.
The file name is defined as queryNEVersionResult.xml by the operator.
Command format:
NODEB
QUERYNEVERSION:NELIST="SubNetwork=0,NE=0#$%SubNetwork=0,N
E=1",FILENAME="ftp://sdrmgrson:son123@10.94.207.78:21111/software
version
management/query/queryNEVersionResult.xml";
Result analysis:
If both NEs are successfully queried, the system returns 0 as the result. If both NES fails
to be queried, the system returns 1 as the result. If one NE is successfully queried, and the
other one fails to be queried, the failed NE MOI information is displayed in the FAILNELIST
field, and the failure cause is displayed in the DETAIL field.
6-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
6-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 7
LTE TDD
Table of Contents
QUICKADDCELL .......................................................................................................7-1
QUICKDELETECELL .................................................................................................7-4
CREATECATDD.........................................................................................................7-5
DELETECATDD .........................................................................................................7-6
OPTIMIZE ORACLE...................................................................................................7-7
7.1 QUICKADDCELL
Shortcut
QUICKADDCELL
Function
The command is only applicable to Japan LTE TDD.
Command
QUICKADDCELL:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,MCC=<MCC>,MNC
=<MNC>,BPLTYPE=<BPLTYPE>,BPLSLOTNO=<BPLSLOTNO>,BPLPORT=<BPLPORT
>,RRUTYPE=<RRUTYPE>,RRURACKNO=<RRURACKNO>,CELLLOCALID=<CELLLOC
ALID>,TAC=<TAC>,BANDINDICATOR=<BANDINDICATOR>,EARFCN=<EARFCN>,PCI
=<PCI>,BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>[,USERLABEL=<USERLABEL>][,EUTRANCELL
TDD=<EUTRANCELLTDD>][,EAI=<EAI>][,ECELLEQUIPMENTFUNCTIONTDD=<ECELL
EQUIPMENTFUNCTIONTDD>];
Input Parameters
Table 7-1 shows the input parameters of QUICKADDCELL.
Table 7-1 QUICKADDCELL Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET-
SubNet-
WORK
work ID
NE
MCC
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
NE ID
INT
Required
MCC
STRING
3~23
"440"
Required
7-1
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
Instance
Count
MNC
MNC
STRING
2~23
"20"
Required
BPLTYPE
BPL Type
BPL Typ-
BPL
Required
INT
3~12
Required
INT
0~2
Required
RRU Typ-
R8924DT
Required
INT
51~201
Required
e(Enum)
6
BPLSLO-
BPL Solt
TNO
No
BPLPOR-
BPL Port
No
RRU-
RRU Type
TYPE
9
10
e(Enum)
RRURAC-
RRU
KNO
Rack No
CELLLO-
Cell ID
INT
0~255
Required
CALID
11
TAC
TAC
INT
0~65535
Required
12
BANDIN-
Band In-
INT
30~64
Required
DICATOR
dication
FLOAT
Required
for Frequency
13
EARFCN
Center
Carrier
Frequency(MHz)
14
PCI
PCI
INT
0~503
Required
15
BAND-
System
System
20
Required
WIDTH
Band Wid-
Band Wid-
th(MHz)
th(Enum)
USERLA-
Cell User
STRING
0~128
ANY
BEL
Label
EUTRAN-
E-UTRAN
CELLTDD
TDD Cell
16
17
OPTION
INT
1~9999
ANY
OPTION
ID
18
EAI
Emer-
INT
gency
0~167772
15
ANY
OPTION
Alarm
Area
Code
7-2
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 7 LTE TDD
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
19
ECELLE-
Baseband
QUIP-
Resource
MENT-
Configu-
FUNC-
ration ID
Instance
Count
INT
1~9999
ANY
OPTION
TIONTDD
Output Parameters
Table 7-2 shows the output parameters of QUICKADDCELL.
Table 7-2 QUICKADDCELL Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Table 7-3 describes BPL Type Enumerate Type.
Table 7-3 BPL Type
Macro
Meanings
BPL
BPL
Table 7-4 describes RRU Type Enumerate Type.

Table 7-4 RRU Type
Macro
Meanings
R8924DT
R8924DT
Table 7-5 describes System Band Width Enumerate Type.

Table 7-5 System Band Width
Macro
Meanings
20
100RB
Example
QUICKADDCELL:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,MCC="440",MNC="20",BPLTYPE=BPL,BP
LSLOTNO=3,BPLPORT=0,RRUTYPE=R8924DT,RRURACKNO=51,CELLLOCALID=0,T
AC=0,BANDINDICATOR=30,EARFCN=0.00,PCI=0,BANDWIDTH=20,USERLABEL="0
",EUTRANCELLTDD=1,EAI=0,ECELLEQUIPMENTFUNCTIONTDD=1;
7-3
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
7.2 QUICKDELETECELL
Shortcut
QUICKDELETECELL
Function
The command is only applicable to Japan LTE TDD.
Command
QUICKDELETECELL:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,CELLLOCALID
=<CELLLOCALID>,LEVEL=<LEVEL>;
Input Parameters
Table 7-6 shows the input parameters of QUICKDELETECELL.
Table 7-6 QUICKDELETECELL Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET-
Subnet-
WORK
work ID
NE
CELLLO-
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
NE ID
INT
Required
Cell ID
INT
0~255
Required
Delete
Delete
DEFAULT
Required
Level
Level(En-
CALID
4
LEVEL
um)
Output Parameters
Table 7-7 shows the output parameters of QUICKDELETECELL.
Table 7-7 QUICKDELETECELL Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Table 7-8 describes Delete Level Enumerate Type.
Table 7-8 Delete Level
Macro
Meanings
DEFAULT
Default
7-4
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 7 LTE TDD
Example
QUICKDELETECELL:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,CELLLOCALID=0,LEVEL=DEFAULT;
7.3 CREATECATDD
Function
Create CA
Command
CREATECATDD:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,COPERTYPE=<COPER
TYPE>,CELLLOCALID=<CELLLOCALID>,CELLPAIR=<CELLPAIR>;
Input Parameters
Table 7-9 shows the input parameters of CREATECATDD.
Table 7-9 CREATECATDD Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET-
SubNet-
WORK
work ID
NE
NE ID
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
INT
0~999999
Required
DLCA
Required
INT
0~255
Required
STRING
0~99
Required
999
3
COPER-
Cooper-
CA Type(
TYPE
ative Re-
Enum)
lationship
Type
4
CELLLO-
Source
CALID
Cell ID
CELL-
Cell Pair
PAIR
Output Parameters
Table 7-10 shows the output parameters of CREATECATDD.
Table 7-10 CREATECATDD Output Parameters
No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Table 7-11 describes CA Type Enumerate Type.
7-5
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Table 7-11 CA Type

Macro
Meanings
DLCA
DL CA
ULCOMP
UL COMP
Example
CREATECATDD:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,COPERTYPE=DLCA,CELLLOCALID=0,CE
LLPAIR="460/01/1001/1";
7.4 DELETECATDD
Function
Delete CA
Command
DELETECATDD:SUBNETWORK=<SUBNETWORK>,NE=<NE>,CELLLOCALID=<CELL
LOCALID>[,CELLPAIR=<CELLPAIR>];
Input Parameters
Table 7-12 shows the input parameters of DELETECATDD.
Table 7-12 DELETECATDD Input Parameters
No
Name
Descrip-
Type
Range
Default
Option
tion
1
SUBNET-
SubNet-
WORK
work ID
NE
NE ID
Instance
Count
INT
0~999999
Required
INT
0~999999
Required
999
3
CELLLO-
Source
CALID
Cell ID
CELL-
Cell Pair
INT
0~255
Required
STRING
0~99
ANY
PAIR
OPTION
Output Parameters
Table 7-13 shows the output parameters of DELETECATDD.
7-6
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Chapter 7 LTE TDD
Table 7-13 DELETECATDD Output Parameters

No
Name
Type
Description
Instance Count
RESULT
STRING
Result
Example
DELETECATDD:SUBNETWORK=0,NE=0,CELLLOCALID=0,CELLPAIR="460/01/1000
1/1";
7.5 OPTIMIZE ORACLE

Function
This command triggers the information collection of Oracle to set up optimized executive
plan, so that the License authoritative timeout on subnet level can be resolved.
When there is a configuration updating or base station handover, and so big changes on
the configuration happen. The License authoritative timeout on subnet level may occurs
without updating the Oracle executive plan. The command gives another way to manually
trigger the Oracle optimization paralleled with the automatic updating.
Syntax
OPTIMIZE ORACLE;
Input Parameters
The command has no input parameters.
Output Parameters
For a description of the output parameters of the OPTIMIZE ORACLE command, refer to
Table 7-14
Table 7-14 OPTIMIZE ORACLE Command Output Parameter Descriptions
No.
Parameter
Type
Description
Instance Count
101
RESULT
Character
Operation result
102
DETAIL
Character
Failure reason
Examples
OPTIMIZE ORACLE;
1 Successful
7-7
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)
Rows: 1
7-8
SJ-20141110151550-007|2015-06-02 (R2.0)

SJ-20141110151550-006-ZXSDR UniRAN TDD-LTE (V3.20.50) Initial Configuration Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SJ-20141110151550-006-ZXSDR UniRAN TDD-LTE (V3.20.50) Initial Configuration Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ZXSDR UniRAN

TD-LTE Base Station

Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by

contractual confidentiality obligations.

Added the following items

SHOW CHANNEL STM1,

UNBLOCK CHANNEL STM1,

GAIN, SHOW E1, SHOW T1, MOVETO TARGETSUBNET,

WB_BIND, SET CLOCK, SHOW CLOCK, SET RAS

Updated functions of the following items:

Updated the radio parameter description of all items

Updated the paramerter description of the following items:

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Updated examples of all items

Serial Number: SJ-20141110151550-007

Chapter 2 Configuration Managment ....................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 Dynamic Management .............................................................. 3-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

3.1.1 SNTP TIME ............................................................................................. 3-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

3.1.38 SHOW BAT ACOM DEVICE DATA ........................................................ 3-74

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

3.1.75 RESET BOARD RADIO .......................................................................3-141

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

3.1.112 SHOW BOARD MODE.......................................................................3-212

Chapter 4 Diagnose Management............................................................. 4-1

Chapter 5 Maintance Test Tools................................................................ 5-1

Chapter 6 Software Version Management................................................ 6-1

Chapter 7 LTE TDD ..................................................................................... 7-1

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

This page intentionally left blank.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

About This Manual

What Is in This Manual

Describes the commands related with system

Chapter 2, Configuration Management

Describes the commands related with configuration

Chapter 3, Dynamic Management

Describes the commands related with SDR/LTE dynamic

Chapter 4, Diagnose Management

Describes the commands related with diagnose

Chapter 5, Maintenance Test Tools

Describes the commands related with maintenance test

Chapter 6, Software Version

Describes the commands related with software version

Chapter 7, LTE TDD

Describes the commands related with LTE TDD

Arguments in each command are case-sensitive.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Note: provides additional information about a topic.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

If the command is successfully executed, the

current CPU usage of the server is displayed. If

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXSDR UniRAN Command Reference

If the command is successfully executed, the current RAM

usage of the server is displayed.If the command fails, the

system displays failure information.

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

Chapter 1 System Management

ZTE Proprietary and Confidential

ZXSDR UniRAN Command Reference

Table 1-3 GETHDUSAGE Command Output Parameter Descriptions

If the command is successfully executed, the current